JP7435375B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area .

For example, if a game ball that is equipped with a variable ball entry means and enters an internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, the player A pachinko machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous for players is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197312

However, in conventional gaming machines, the games tend to be monotonous, and there has been a desire for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It had an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area. variable entry means;
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the inner area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state providing means capable of providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball enters the special ball entering means,
The variable ball entry means is configured such that only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area,
This gaming machine is
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
By changing the state to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, the value for the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route that can flow down to the special ball entry means. configured to be able to change the value of a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means by a variable means that can change the value of the game ball,
The variable means is configured to perform a predetermined lottery result when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first chance entry means or the second opportunity entry means. configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a regulating means is provided that allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball to pass in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game ball that enters the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter;
This gaming machine is
comprising an award confirmation means for confirming the award of one gaming value to the special gaming state when a game ball enters the special entry means;
When the game ball is controlled to be in the advantageous state by the variable means and the game ball enters the special ball entry means and the special game state is given , the case where the special game state is given is higher than the case where the variable means is controlled to the non-advantageous state. Also, the configuration is such that it is easy to determine the provision of the special gaming state of the predetermined type that is most advantageous to the player,
This gaming machine is
an activation standby period executed at least before the variable means controls the advantageous state ;
A presentation means capable of performing a preliminary presentation during the operation standby period ,
The performance means is configured to be able to select the preceding performance to be executed in accordance with the operation standby period from among the plurality of types of preceding performances, when executing the preceding performance,
A game ball that does not pass through the ball path is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the variable value is applied to game balls that have passed through the specific area after the next game ball after the game ball that entered the ball. The gist is that the device is configured to be able to change the value of the falling game balls by acting on them.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to dramatically improve interest.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation time judgment processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry counting process. It is a flow chart showing special prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing non-special winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows special gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the type ball entry process. It is a flowchart showing V winning jackpot setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a blade member opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting winning part control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd display control process. It is a flow chart which shows bypass mechanism control processing. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball monitoring processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a front view of the center winning unit. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a route distribution member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the rotating body unit. (a) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a housed state, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a protruding state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a housed state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a protruding state and its related configuration. FIG. 7 is a front view for explaining a route distribution member and the like according to another embodiment. FIG. 7 is a partially sectional front view for explaining route distribution areas and the like according to another embodiment. It is a flowchart showing starting winning pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th display control process. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display unit. It is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state where the performance accessories unit has appeared. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for deciding a decorative pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot types. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the structure of a variable pattern table at the time of a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device when a jackpot occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display device in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in gold mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative pattern display device during a roulette performance. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a pending display change process is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of accessory effect setting processing. 99 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 98, which is part of the accessory production setting process. (a) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "end" time, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "until next time". FIG. 7 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a reduced diameter state. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in an expanded diameter state. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotary body in a diameter-expanded state. 102 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 101. FIG. It is a front view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). It is a side view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of presentation using an upper rotating body. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect|mode of the stopped state (stopped state without enlarged display) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies based on the 1st development production pattern. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of a stopped state (weak/SMALL enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the second development effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a mode of the stopped state (strong/SMALL enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the third development effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect of the stopped state (weak/BIG enlargement stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies concerning the 4th development production pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect of the stopped state (strong/BIG enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the fifth development effect pattern. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body according to another embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 constituting its outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. However, in FIG. 3, for convenience, nails and ornaments disposed on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 etc., the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. can be stored in. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

A production button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. When the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed or the content of the performance is changed on the performance display device 42, which will be described later.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (not shown) (variable resistor) for detecting an operation amount of the operation section of the handle 18, and the like.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. The handle 18 is also provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, firing of game balls by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while gripping the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light-emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light-emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach.

For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an annular illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Furthermore, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the annular illumination section 102, which are turned on when a predetermined error occurs. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination section 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

Further, above the firing device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

In addition, the reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side, pass through the lower tray communication path 71, and are paid out to the lower tray 15. It happens.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides a game ball fired from a firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. The rail 50 may be a ball passage. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the firing device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 as a regulating means, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are removed from the area.

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. The area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be the specific area. If the game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72. .

The game board 30 also includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball entry means, and a through-ball winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b). A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means, etc. are arranged in a through hole formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that have entered the various ball entry means, corresponding to the general winning section 31 and other ball entry means. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and a first starting switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32. A first starting winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the winning part 33a, a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting winning part 33b, and a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. A prize ball (game ball) is paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting winning section 33, 3 prizes will be awarded, if a ball enters the general winning section 31, 5 prizes will be awarded, and if a ball enters the variable winning device 32, 10 prizes will be awarded. The ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not win in various winning means such as the general winning section 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through the out port 36. . Further, the game board 30 has a large number of nails planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also installed.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4, FIGS. 40 to 45, and the like.

The central winning unit 37 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 that forms an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 is visible through the front panel 402.

A pair of left and right ball entrance openings 403 are formed in the upper part of the housing 400, which serve as entrances through which game balls flowing down the game area enter the internal area 401. Further, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the ball entry opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. There is. The "wing member 404" constitutes the "opening/closing member" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is provided so as to be rotatably displaceable between a closed position in which the corresponding ball entry opening 403 is closed and an open position in which it is opened. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot enter). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (ball entry possible). becomes.

Although the details will be described later, the blade member 404 is used when a ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), and a small prize is selected in a lottery based on the entering ball. When a winning ticket is won, it remains open for a predetermined period of time. In other words, if a small win is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), the predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) in this embodiment is This corresponds to the case where it is established. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is in the open position. The other is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 includes a route distribution area 406 where game balls entering from the ball entry opening 403 are first guided, a win/fail lottery area 407 provided at a position below the area, and a lottery area 407 provided at a position further below the route distribution area 406. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area, and an accessory operation lottery area 409 provided on the right side of the win/fail lottery area 407.

First, the route distribution area 406 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, a game ball that enters the internal area 401 from the ball entry opening 403 is guided once to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then guided to the center in the left and right direction of the route distribution area 406. An introduction passage 601 for guiding, a dropping passage 602 for dropping downward the game balls led out from the exit part 601a of the introduction passage 601 opened at the center in the left and right direction of the route distribution area 406, and a dropping passage 602 for dropping the game balls downward. A route distributing member 603 as a route distributing means provided, a normal guide path 604 provided at the left side of the route distributing member 603 and capable of guiding game balls to the winning lottery area 407, and a route distributing member 603. A special guide path (special path) 605 is provided at the right position and can guide game balls to the accessory activation lottery area 409.

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right entrances 601b of the introduction passage 601 are each provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting passage of a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b. The game ball is configured to pass through, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having a shaft hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 projecting upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion It includes a left piece 614 that projects leftward from 611 and a right piece 615 that projects rightward from shaft 611 .

The shaft pin 610 is inserted into the shaft hole 611a of the shaft portion 611. The shaft pin 610 has its rear end supported by the upper rear wall 400a that defines the back side of the drop passage 602, and its front end supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) that defines the front side of the drop passage 602. has been done. As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610.

Further, a protrusion 617 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is formed at a lower position of the route distribution member 603. In normal times, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route distributing member 603 is moved to the center position in the left-right direction (axis pin 610), and the right piece 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in a rightward tilted state urged by the rightward tilted surface of the protrusion 617.

In such a rightward tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 falls into the special guide passage 605 on the right side. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state in which it cannot flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, under normal conditions when the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route distribution member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is opened, and the falling passage 602 is closed. The game ball is guided to the left side normal guide path 604 along the left side guide surface constituted by the left side surface of the center piece 613 and the upper surface of the left piece 614 of the route distribution member 603.

Accordingly, the route distribution member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball in contact with the left piece 614 [see FIG. 41(b) ].

As a result, for a predetermined period of time, the route distributing member 603 has a central piece 613 tilted to the left of the center position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610), a left piece 614 tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and a protrusion. The left inclined state is biased by the left inclined surface of the portion 617.

In this left-leaning state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall 602b of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 is directed to the left normal guide passage 604. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state where it cannot flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

That is, during a predetermined period of time when the route distribution member 603 is in the leftward tilted state, the route distribution member 603 causes the normal guide passage 604 to be in a closed state, while the special guide passage 605 is in an open state. As a result, at this timing, a game ball falling down the falling path 602 (for example, as shown in FIG. If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side along the right guide surface formed by the right side surface of the center piece 613 of the route distribution member 603 and the upper surface of the right piece 615. It will be destroyed.

Once the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left, the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side, (the applied force is also applied), and it rotates clockwise, returning to its normal rightward tilted state (see FIG. 41(c)).

In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, corresponds to the second state. Equivalent to. Further, in this embodiment, in the first state and the second state, the route distribution member 603 directs the game ball to the first route consisting of the normal guide passage 604 etc., the second route consisting of the special guide passage 605 etc. A state in which flow is possible constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the accessory activation lottery area 409 will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide path 605 can enter (pass through). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width that allows each game ball to pass through. Furthermore, the game balls that have passed through the special gate 650 are discharged to the outside of the internal area 401 (to the back side of the game board 30) via a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects game balls passing therethrough. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by this special gate switch 651, an activation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. If the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined period of time. Details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the prize ball is not paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

Next, the configuration of the win/fail lottery area 407 will be explained in detail. The win/fail lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a win/fail sorting means. The rotating body unit 410 has a function of allocating the destination of game balls guided from the route allocation area 406 via the normal guide path 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401. Note that the width of the normal guide path 604 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one ball at a time.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 serving as a base portion, and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side thereof.

A substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 is attached to the unit base 411 on an installation base 413 formed protruding from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotationally driving the rotating body 414 is attached. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotary body motor 415 to the rotary body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed so that its upper surface faces obliquely upward on the front side and the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. The rotating body motor 415 is constituted by a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main controller 261. Under such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 has pocket portions 416 formed at three locations on its outer peripheral edge, each of which can receive one game ball at a time. The three pocket sections 416 are divided into one special pocket section 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket sections 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and above, and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket part 416a is open on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have a bottom wall part 417 like the non-special pocket part 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material colored differently from other portions. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the special pocket section 416a and the non-special pocket section 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 disposed to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the periphery of the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

The upper edge of the cylinder wall part 431 projects upward from the upper surface of the stage part 432, and a gate part 435 is provided on the front side thereof to communicate the inner circumferential side and the outer circumferential side of the cylinder wall part 431. .

Further, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured such that a game ball can roll thereon. In the stage part 432, a part located behind the gate part 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the cylindrical wall part 431 side, and a part located in front of the gate part 435 is tilted backward (toward the gate part 435 side). It slopes downward.

As a result, the game balls led out from the exit part 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the win/fail lottery area 407 and guided to the rear side of the stage part 432, While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall 431, it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise toward the front on the stage 432, and swings left and right multiple times in front of the gate 435. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a or non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotary body 414 match, the rotary body enters into the pocket portion 416. .

Furthermore, the unit base 411 has a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game balls accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b. An out passage 428 for discharging the inside area 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotating body 414, that is, at a position to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427, that is, at the far right position of the first V winning passage 427.

Further, the entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 is open on the upper surface of the installation stand 413, and the pocket part 416 of the rotary body 414 is configured to be able to pass above it. The game ball that has entered the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435 is moved between the special pocket section 416a and the entrance of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. When the ball matches, the ball falls downward from the special pocket part 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427. In addition, at a position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, a cylindrical wall portion 431 protruding downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 prevents the game balls from falling off from the side surface of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket part 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate part 435, as the rotating body 414 rotates, the non-special pocket part 416b and the entrance part of the first V winning passage 427 Even if the positions match, the bottom wall part 417 provided in the non-special pocket part 416b prevents the game ball accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b from falling (entering the ball) into the 1st V winning passage 427. It has become.

Further, at a position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch 431a is formed at the lower edge of the cylinder wall 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket part 416b in which the game ball is accommodated and the out passage 428 match, the game ball that was accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b is removed from the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417, the ball moves toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414, and falls (enters the ball) into the out passage 428 via the notch 431a of the cylindrical wall portion 431.

Incidentally, the housing 400 is formed with a connection passage 429 connected to the exit portion of the first V winning passage 427, and the first V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408 are brought into communication through the connecting passage 429.

Further, the first V winning passage 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

In a jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1V winning passage 427, a prescribed time of 30 seconds passes after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. This is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined round) with one opening/closing operation until the closed state is set as one special prize state on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states include a "3 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 3 times, a "7 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times, and a "7 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times. A "15 round jackpot" in which (round) is repeated 15 times is set.

However, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects a ball entry, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the jackpot state is started in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket part 416a of the rotary body 414 and passes through the 1V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is selected by type lottery. You will be guided to area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entry ball detection switch 462 that detects game balls that pass through this and are discharged outside the internal area 401.

Further, in a predetermined section in the circumferential direction of the upper edge of the cylinder wall part 431 including the upper part of the entrance of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428, there is a groove extending toward the inner circumferential side of the cylinder wall part 431. A formed overhang 440 is provided.

The overhang portion 440 is configured to cover a portion of each pocket portion 416 located below (an area approximately half of the rotating body 414 in the radial direction) from above. As a result, another game ball rides on top of the game ball that entered the predetermined pocket part 416, and the two game balls stacked vertically continue to the 1st V winning path 427 or the out path 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball enters a ball or, for some reason, jumps over a cylinder wall part 431 and directly enters a pocket part 416 located at a position that coincides with a first V winning passage 427 and an out passage 428. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism section 721 is provided at the rear of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism section 721 includes a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening housing section 433 formed in the most upstream part of the stage section 432, and a movable accessory 722 that operates the movable accessory 722. A movable accessory solenoid 725 is provided as a member driving means. The movable accessory solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by a main controller 261 that constitutes a movable object control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so that it can be slid (raised and lowered) in the vertical direction. In a normal state when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is in a non-energized state, the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely accommodated in the opening housing section 433, and its upper surface is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage section 432. [See FIGS. 44(a) and 45(a)]. This accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to a non-advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism section 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises and enters a protruding state in which a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage section 432 [Fig. 44(b), see FIG. 45(b)]. The operation of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to a predetermined operation in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to an advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there is a left inclined part 727 that gently slopes downward to the left from approximately the center in the left and right direction, and a right slope that slopes gently downward to the right from the approximately central part in the left and right direction. An inclined portion 728 is formed.

In a normal state when the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely housed in the opening housing portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opens in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604a is guided to the left or right of the stage section 432 by the left inclined part 727 or right inclined part 728 on the upper surface of the movable accessory 722.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable accessory 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

Then, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state projecting from the stage part 432, the movable accessory 722 blocks the front of the exit section 604a of the normal guide path 604, and the entrance section 730a of the second V winning path 730 and the normal guide path. 604 and the outlet portion 604a thereof are in a state facing each other [see FIGS. 44(b) and 45(b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

In addition, in the protruding state in which the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the outlet part 730b of the second V winning passage 730 is opposite to the inlet part 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400. It will be in a state where it is facing the direction. As a result, the game ball can enter from the second V winning passage 730 to the bypass passage 737, and both passages 730 and 737 are brought into communication.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state that protrudes from the stage part 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in a communicating state through which the game ball can pass through the second V winning passage 730.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. Further, the outlet portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens into the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 at a position above the 15R ball entry port 731. As a result, in the protruding state where the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are directly directed to the 15R without going through the rotary body unit 410 and the type distribution mechanism part 741 described later. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the entrance 731. That is, by operating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741.

A second special ball entry detection switch 738 is provided in the bypass passage 737 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing therethrough. Then, when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. .

However, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects the ball entry, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the game ball enters the 15R ball. After the ball enters the opening 731, a jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodated state while the game balls remain in the second V winning passage 730, the remaining balls are guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739. and is configured to be detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15) is The configuration is such that a number of game balls are paid out. Of course, the number of game balls paid out in response to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to ten, and may be any other number. Further, it may be configured such that when a game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches, no game ball is paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot that occurs when a gaming ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. This is sometimes referred to as a "V-winning jackpot."

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be explained in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there is a 15R ball entrance 731 where a jackpot state of "15 rounds" (15 rounds jackpot) is given when a game ball enters, and a "7 round" when a game ball enters. 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is given, and 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is given when a game ball enters the ball. It is provided. Here, the "15R ball entry port 731," the "7R ball entry port 732," and the "3R ball entry port 733" constitute the "type-based ball entry means" in this embodiment.

Further, the 15R ball entry opening 731 is provided with a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball entered here. Similarly, the 7R ball entrance 732 is provided with a 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is provided with a 3R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball guided to the type lottery area 408 via the 1V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 is determined by the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance. A type sorting mechanism section 741 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means) for sorting to one of the types 733.

The type sorting mechanism section 741 includes a starting board 742 to which game balls led out from the exit section 429a of the connection passage 429 are guided, a first passing board 744 to which game balls that have passed through the starting board 742 are guided, and A second spanning board 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first spanning board 744 is guided; and a 15R guide where the gaming ball that has passed through the second spanning board 745 is guided and which guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passage 746 is provided.

The starting stand 742 is installed at the upper left of the type lottery area 408, and its upper surface is inclined downwardly toward the right.

The first gang plate 744 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the starting platform 742, and its left end is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction as an axis, and the right end is a free end. It is being

The rotation axis of the first span plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor etc. on the back side of the lower rear wall 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first spanning plate 744 is configured to be oscillated up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the first spanning board 744 has an upper surface that is slightly tilted downward to the right, and a forward position where the game ball is guided to the second spanning board 745; , and a falling position that guides the game ball to the 3R ball entrance 733.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first spanning board 744 via the starting platform 742 rolls to the right end of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the forwarding position, The game ball is guided to the second passing board 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first spanning board 744 rolls to the right end of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the above-mentioned falling position, the game ball enters the 3R ball. You will be guided to the mouth 733.

In other words, the first passing board 744 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided via the starting board 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second passing board 745.

The second spanning board 745 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the first spanning board 744, and its left end is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, and the right end is a free end. It is set in.

The rotation axis of the second span plate 745 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor etc. on the back side of the lower rear wall 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The second spanning plate 745 is configured to be oscillated up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second spanning board 745 is tilted slightly downward to the right, and the upper surface is tilted downward more greatly than the advance position where the game ball is guided to the 15R guide path 746. It is configured to be movable between the drop position where the game ball is guided to the 7R ball entrance 732.

Then, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned forwarding position, the game ball will move to the 15R guidance path. You will be guided to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned falling position, the game ball enters the 7R ball. It is guided to the mouth 732.

In other words, the second spanning board 745 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided through the first spanning board 744 to either the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R guiding path 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the second spanning plate 745, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the 15R ball entry opening 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 745 are configured to swing at different periods. For example, the first spanning plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second spanning plate 745.

Further, in this embodiment, after the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball entry, any one of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is activated. When the entry of a ball is detected, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. In addition, when the second special ball entering detection switch 738 detects the ball entering and then the 15R ball entering detection switch 734 detects the ball entering, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot starts. It has become.

From here, we return to the explanation of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting winning part 33a is provided at the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. Further, the second starting winning part 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

Furthermore, the second starting prize part 33b is provided with a pair of opening/closable starting opening opening/closing members 33c on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning part 33b.

In other words, the first starting winning section 33a allows game balls to enter at all times, whereas the second starting winning section 33b uses a ball entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. If the game ball is won, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning section 33b.

Not limited to this, when the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting prize winning section 33b, and if the game ball is won in the ball entry assist lottery, the starting port opens and closes. It may be configured such that the member 33c is in an open state and the game ball can easily enter the second starting prize winning section 33b.

As described above, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided with the first starting winning switch 224a that detects the game ball that has entered there. Similarly, the second starting winning section 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224b that detects a game ball that has entered there. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes a "starting ball entering detection means" in this embodiment.

As will be described in detail later, if a game ball is detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it will be a "hit" that is advantageous to the player, or a "miss". A lottery will be held to determine whether or not it is true.

The "win" in the win/fail lottery includes a "small win" in which the wing member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 is opened, and a "big win" in which the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is conducted based on ball entry detection by the first starting prize switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is shown on a special display device 43, which will be described later. A fluctuating display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common winning lottery is performed in the case where the first starting winning switch 224a detects the ball entering and when the second starting winning switch 224b detects the ball entering. , the common special display device 43 is configured so that a variable display is performed, but the first start-up prize switch 224a performs a variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery conducted based on the detection by the first winning prize switch 224a. It is also possible to separately provide the special display device and a second special display device on which a variable display is performed for teaching the result of the winning/losing lottery performed based on the detection by the second starting winning switch 224b. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball hitting detection means. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display is separately held and stored, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is given priority over the other. It may be configured so that In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratios of the types of jackpot states that are awarded when winning in the lottery may be different or may be the same.

In the game areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, downstream areas are formed in which game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in downstream areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured to allow game balls flowing down there to pass one by one. The downstream area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first downstream route, and the downstream area on the left side may be the second downstream route. Further, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c). If the player wins in the entry assist lottery, the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a specified period of time.

At the upper right of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (normal symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery based on the ball entering (passing the ball) into the through gate 34, and each starting prize section. A special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the special gates 33a and 33b, and a lottery for the activation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (passing the ball) A special gate display device 44 is provided to display the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps. has been done.

Note that the configurations of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 are not particularly limited to the above configuration, and may be configured with different numbers of lamp groups, for example, or may include a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc. It may be configured by different display devices such as a display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), a variable display (switching) for teaching the lottery result of the winning lottery. display) is started, and when the fluctuating display is stopped after a predetermined period of time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed. The first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning means. Further, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the results of the winning lottery are displayed definitively.

If you win a jackpot in such a winning lottery, after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the specified time of 30 seconds must elapse or the variable winning device 32 must be closed. A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "direct hit jackpot") that is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), with one opening and closing operation until it becomes a closed state as one special prize state, on the condition that the specified number of 8 game balls enter the prize. ) will be given.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, only when a "big hit" is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b). When the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special entry ball detection switch 461, or when the movable accessory 722 ( A jackpot state (V winning jackpot) also occurs when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) during the variable display on the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display will change. , is configured to be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that time ends. In other words, the variable display on the special display device 43 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is , a total of up to four fluctuation displays are suspended.

Further, the number of hold times in the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by lighting on a special display device hold lamp 47 provided near the special display device 43. The hold lamp 47 for the special display device of this embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is taught by appropriately switching the lighting/extinguishing state of each lamp.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting prize section 33 during a jackpot or small win, the variable display for that amount will also be suspended, and the variable display will be executed after the jackpot or small win state ends. be done.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, an aspect corresponding to the result of the input assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the entry assist lottery is a winning result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. In addition, the display contents of the through gate display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed definitively.

Additionally, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the through gate display device 41, the corresponding variable display will be performed after the variable display being performed at that point ends. The structure is as follows. In other words, the variable display on the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that the variable display is held is determined by the number of times the variable display is held near the through gate display device 41. The gate hold lamp 48 is lit and displayed. The through gate reservation lamp 48 of this embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of reservations is taught by appropriately switching the on/off state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is a winning result that activates the movable accessory 722, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44, and after the variable display is stopped, the movable accessory 722 is activated. Accessory object 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the actuation assist lottery is displayed definitively.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display or the movable accessory 722 is in operation, and the special gate switch 651 causes the game ball to pass through the special gate 650. Even if it is detected, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) is not suspended.

Furthermore, an effect display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. The display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable prize winning device 32 is arranged at the lower center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter prizes, and when a jackpot situation occurs, the grand prize opening/closing member 32a is opened and the game ball can enter the grand prize opening. It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, a frame cover 213 made of resin is provided on the back side of the game board 30 to protrude rearward and cover the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind. Furthermore, a display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Further, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside thereof is visible.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting winning game balls from various winning means. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Furthermore, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to the general prize switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second panel relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special ball entry detection switch 462, a round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 734, It is electrically connected to a ball detection switch 735, a 3R ball entry detection switch 736), a second special ball entry detection switch 738, and a special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board is to relay various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261, and like the first board relay board, it is connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224a and 224b that detect the ball entering the starting winning parts 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without going through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Excluding cases detected by through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown in the drawings, on the back side of the game board 30, there is provided a solenoid for the big winning opening that opens and closes the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a with the variable winning device 32, and a solenoid for the big winning opening that opens and closes the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a with the variable winning device 32, and with the second starting winning part 33b. A starting port solenoid that opens and closes the pair of starting port opening/closing members 33c is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a third panel relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, reference numbers are not attached to terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming status (jackpot status, time-saving mode, etc.), the front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92, which will be described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a ball entering error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, and a dispensing error, which is output from the dispensing control device 311. A terminal is provided for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed.

That is, the game balls won by each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any winning means are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked state. It is being

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and is locked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The main control device 261 constitutes special game state providing means, opening/closing control means, etc. in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41, special display device 43, and special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a counting switch 223, starting winning switches 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball entry detection switch 437, Various detection switches, various substrates, and blades that can constitute predetermined detection means such as special ball entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special ball entry detection switches 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651. A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that moves the movable accessory 722 up and down, a first spanning board 744, and a second spanning board 745. Various electrical parts such as motors are connected to the That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, various illumination parts, and lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a production pattern command such as a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and displays the display on the production display device 42. let As described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main controller 261 displays whether or not there is a win, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays the winning result. , a display matching that of the special display device 43 is performed.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing) is activated. (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven and game balls are fired at predetermined intervals with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. This embodiment is configured to fire at approximately 0.6 second intervals (approximately 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, there is a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a), and a jackpot that opens the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404). ) A win/fail random number counter C1 used in a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win that opens the ``win'', and a variable time selection counter used to determine the time of variable display (fluctuating time) performed on the special display device 43. C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the win/fail random number counter C1, and the detection of the through gate switch 225, whether to open the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c). Entering assist random number counter C3 used in the ball entering assist lottery to determine whether or not to actuate the ball, and activation assist random number used in the activation assist lottery to determine whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

The counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the input assist random number counter C3 is stored. It is provided. Both the special fluctuation holding area and the normal fluctuation holding area include one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, in each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, etc. Stored sequentially. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above.

Furthermore, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/fail random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 399), the lower limit value as the opening price is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the win/fail random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the applicable random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 399) similar to the win/fail random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the win/fail random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), it is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. The value of the winning/falsifying random number counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

In this embodiment, in the winning/failure lottery performed based on the value of the winning/failing random number counter C1 stored in the special fluctuation holding area, a lottery result of "small win", "big win", or "miss" is obtained. The win/fail lottery process related to the jackpot lottery and the small win lottery constitutes the open lottery process in this embodiment.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of random number values that result in a "jackpot" is one, and that value is "0". That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" is 1/400, and a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "jackpot", resulting in a 15-round jackpot state. It happens.

Further, the number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". In other words, the probability of winning a "small win" is 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is released for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is released for 1.5 seconds. There is a "hit". Therefore, among the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to a "short small win".

When a "short small win" is won, a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "short small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 0.5 seconds. It happens. Also, if you win a "long small win", a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "long small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. It happens. Here, the function of the main controller 261 which executes the small winning lottery and the big winning lottery and also determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member such as the blade member 404 constitutes the opening/closing pattern determining means in this embodiment.

Further, among the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "miss", and in the case of "miss", the special display device 43 displays the mode corresponding to "miss" (the lighting lamp). combination), a stop display is performed.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or "big win."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, a gaming state is provided in which the time (variable time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened. Ru. In addition, even if the next jackpot state does not occur after the end of the jackpot state, this gaming state ends when the special display device 43 displays the variable four times, and then returns to the normal gaming state. Return to

Hereinafter, a gaming state in which the varying time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as a "time reduction mode", and a normal gaming state in which a normal varying display is performed in which the varying time is not shortened will be referred to as a "normal mode". The specific variation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time reduction mode", the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting prize part 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high ball entry state" is established in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting winning part 33b. becomes. As a result, in the "time reduction mode", compared to the "normal mode" where the starting port opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened and the game ball is in a "low ball entry state" where it is difficult to enter the second starting winning part 33b. , it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting winning part 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through-gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball through the through-gate 34 is 10 seconds. , the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the entry assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the entry assist lottery is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time period during which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the open state becomes longer, game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33b more frequently, and successive drawings are made continuously. The balls will hold up well.

In this way, in the "time saving mode", if the pending variable display on the special display device 43 successively wins a small win (after closing the blade member 404 and performing the variable display, Although the flow of opening is the same, since the fluctuation time is short), the blade members 404 are opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). For this reason, it is easy to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 all at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small win (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33, and the probability of winning a "small win (short small win)" The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in both modes (time reduction mode and normal mode).

Furthermore, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the actuation assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the special gate switch 651 will not be disclosed. The same is true for both modes.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the special variable reservation area of the RAM 503.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 when a "small win" is achieved in the win/fail lottery in the "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds". Note that a variable time selection table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2 seconds variation" or "3 seconds variation" is stored in the ROM 502 in advance. Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the first variation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

In addition, the variation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "big hit" or "miss" in the lottery in the "normal mode" is "7 seconds".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win", or "miss"). . Note that the variation time related to the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of 2 second variation, 3 second variation, 7 second variation, and 0.1 second variation according to this embodiment, and different variation times may be adopted. You may.

Further, the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball entering assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Ru.

Normally, there are eight random number values that can be won, and the range is from 1 to 8. When the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, the through gate display device 41 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then stops in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to winning or losing. A display is performed, and if the prize is won, the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a predetermined period of time.

Further, the operation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (ie, 19). The operation assist random number counter C4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired.

Usually, there are 15 winning random number values, and the range is 1 to 15. When the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, the special gate display device 44 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then stops displaying in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to winning or losing. is held, and if the winner is won, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 will be in a protruding state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes the operation assist lottery constitutes the "lottery processing execution means" and the "state lottery means".

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by an input. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained here first, and then main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores the detected information. Incidentally, when the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Furthermore, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, variable time selection counter C2, entry assist random number counter C3, and actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, each "399", "9", "9", "19"), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step S304, a starting winning process is executed in conjunction with winning in the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b), and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Through-gate passing processing is executed in accordance with this, and in step S306, entry counting processing is executed in accordance with the entry of a ball into the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In the subsequent step S307, detection is performed by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entry into the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or by the second special ball entry detection switch 738. A special winning process is executed in response to the detection (the entry of the movable accessory 722 into the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730).

Furthermore, in step S308, a non-special winning process is executed in response to detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 (ball entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414), and in step S309, , executes special gate passage processing as the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

After that, in step S310, the type ball entry process is executed in accordance with the detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (ball entry into the 15R ball entry port 731, 7R ball entry port 732, and 3R ball entry port 733). , temporarily end the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13.

The execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a win/fail random number storage area for storing the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area for storing the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a suspended fluctuation. A starting winning determination flag is provided for determining whether the display is based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, either the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b.

In addition, in the special fluctuation reservation area in this embodiment, apart from the area for storing the values of the above-mentioned win/fail random number counter C1 and fluctuation time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, "jackpot" is included. A jackpot flag indicating that you have won ``, a losing flag indicating that you have won, a long small win flag indicating that you have won a ``long small win,'' a short flag that indicates that you have won a short small win. A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag indicating the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the entry of game balls into the first and second starting winning parts 33a and 33b is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first starting winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process moves to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process advances to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the respective values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas in the special variable holding area. Here, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special fluctuation holding area during a predetermined jackpot state. Alternatively, during a predetermined jackpot state, when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special fluctuation holding area, the predetermined condition may be satisfied at a predetermined rate, for example, with a probability of 60%.

In step S505, the starting winning determination flag of the holding area in which the values of the winning/losing random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on. In addition, the starting winning prize determination flag of this embodiment is set to ON when the suspended variable display is based on the ball entering the first starting winning part 33a, and is set to ON when the ball entering the second starting winning part 33b. is set to off if the

In the subsequent step S506, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a "small win" or "big win". Note that details of the validity determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variation time determination process is performed to determine the variation time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Note that details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S508, the first command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) is determined whether the ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b. It includes information indicating whether the variation information is based on the base, information indicating "small win" or "big win", information indicating variation time, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). be done.

Here, details of the validity determination process in step S506 will be explained with reference to FIG. 14. In this embodiment, the type of small win (long small win, short small win) is also determined in the success/failure determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches "0", which is the value corresponding to "jackpot". In addition, during a predetermined jackpot state, various counter values corresponding to specific jackpots, such as certain variable jackpots, which may be given a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode after the end of the jackpot, are stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A predetermined condition may be satisfied if the Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot condition will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches "1", which is the value corresponding to "miss". Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is "missing", the missing flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win", in step S5105, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed to "long small win". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "win". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit occurrence flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that it is a "short small win", the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is ended.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether the mode is a time reduction mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, a 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to ON. , this process ends. In other words, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the corresponding variation display is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a long small win, a short small win, or a loss.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not a long small hit occurrence flag was set in the right/fail determination process that was performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win," in step S5204, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to "0. , 1''.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "2 to 9", in step S5205, the variable time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43 After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if a "short small hit" occurs, then in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to "0, 1". Determine whether it matches either of the two.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5208 is negative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, the possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected is higher when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, in the case of a "jackpot" or "miss", in step S5209, a 7 seconds display is displayed indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the process in step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the second starting winning section 33b. This is determined based on the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the hold counter Na is incremented by 1 in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas of the special variable holding area. In step S512, a validity determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S512 is the same as the validity determination process in step S506 above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S513, a fluctuation time determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a first command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the through gate display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, the process advances to step S603, and the normal hold is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the input assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas in the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the ball entry counting process in step S306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 by determining whether or not there is a detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601. Determine whether or not it was done. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, a ball entry command is set for the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 side receives a ball entering command, it outputs a ball entering sound effect and lights and blinks a ball entering lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has entered. It is configured to notify.

Thereafter, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by 1. In the subsequent step S7204, a monitoring timer setting process that is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Furthermore, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. Note that the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 to be described later) performed every 4 mec. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be explained with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether there is detection information of a game ball by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not a jackpot state is in progress, with reference to a jackpot flag to be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the process is immediately terminated. That is, during the jackpot state, if a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, , even if a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730) and the game ball is detected by the second special entry ball detection switch 738, The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 has detected the ball entering has already been set. Determine whether it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the process ends immediately. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is activated again. Even if a ball is detected, the corresponding jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7303 is negative, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and it is not clear what type of jackpot state will be given. Since this has not yet been determined, the jackpot state is configured not to start until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball has not yet entered the 15R ball entry opening 731. Therefore, the jackpot state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected to the outside of the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) via the out passage 428. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then this process is ended.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, then in step S7502, it is determined whether or not a third display flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, it is determined in step S7503 whether or not the accessory in operation flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether the movable accessory 722 is in operation (in a protruding state). Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, the process is immediately terminated.

As a result, even if a game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, The activation assist lottery is invalidated, and the configuration is such that the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7503, in step S7504, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in a predetermined operation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process is ended.

Next, the type entry process of step S310 will be explained with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether the special winning flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 detects a ball entry. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, a 15R jackpot flag indicating a 15 round jackpot is set on in step S7603. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 detects the ball entrance. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7 round jackpot is set on in step S7606. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If the determination in step S7605 is negative, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detects the ball entry. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, a 3R jackpot flag indicating a 3-round jackpot is set on in step S7609. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step S111 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S111 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step S111.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display device 43, second start prize section 33b, etc. updated in the previous process is sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device.

For example, when starting a variable display on the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command signal output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the production display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and controls the display control device 45 to display the display mode on the effect display device 42. give instructions to

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42, a confirmation command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In response, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed on the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, if the jackpot is in progress, or if the right to jackpot has been granted but the jackpot has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. (during a small hit state), the configuration is such that the subtraction process of the first display timer that measures the fluctuation time on the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), so if the special display device 43 If ball entry is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 during the variable display of the effect display device 42 and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The confirmation command will not be sent to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and will be sent after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, the game ball that entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning path 427 via the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball enters the first V winning path 427. When the game ball is detected by the special entry ball detection switch 461 or enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), the game ball is detected by the second special entry ball detection switch 738. Settings are made for jackpots that occur based on the detection of the winnings. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43 and the control contents of the special display device 43 are set, and the hit determination and performance pattern on the performance display device 42 are also set. Details of this first display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32 and the control content of the variable winning device 32 are set. As a result, when a jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, a blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control details of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control details of the through-gate display device 41, etc. are set. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step S209, a starting prize winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control details of the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning part 33b are set. The details of the starting winning section control process will be described later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special gate display device 44, the control contents of the special gate display device 44, etc. are set. Details of this third display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes a display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, accessory drive control processing related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, drive control processing related to the rotating body unit 410, drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, drive control processing related to the type distribution mechanism section 741, etc. are performed.

For example, in the drive control process related to the rotating body unit 410, control such as rotating the rotating body 414 counterclockwise at a constant speed is performed, and in the drive control process related to the type distribution mechanism section 741, the first passing Controls such as swinging the plate 744 and the second spanning plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm are performed.

Further, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism section 721, control such as making the movable accessory 722 protrude when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. Note that details of the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism section 721 (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") will be described later.

In step S212, remaining ball monitoring processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to confirm whether or not a game ball exists in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. Details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S213, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214 it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After this process, the process moves to step S213. In other words, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the random number counter C1).

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S216 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S218. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step S219, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step S213 is performed at a timing that is the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps S201 to S212, or the end of one cycle of the process in step S215 that is performed within the remaining time. is being executed. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step S216), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 is on. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not a 15R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, a round number counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15", and then the process moves to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is in progress is set on. Thereafter, in the subsequent step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is in progress is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is set to ON. 7500'', and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to ``8'', and the process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a 7R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510, and then the process moves to step S1505, where the same processing as described above is performed.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not a 3R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same processing as described above is performed.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S801, a jackpot flag is referred to to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot is in progress, the process ends immediately. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

Incidentally, the jackpot state includes the middle of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the jackpot state, and the ending period after the end of the jackpot state. Generally, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a jackpot on the special display device 43 until the first opening starts on the variable winning device 32), A display notifying the start of the jackpot condition is performed on the performance display device 42. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round is finished in the variable prize winning device 32), a display is performed on the effect display device 42 to notify the end of the jackpot state and the mode to be awarded after the jackpot.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. The special winning flag is set to ON when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning processing), and the jackpot flag is set to ON. When it is turned on, it is turned off (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the process is immediately terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not started yet, a new fluctuating display will not be started, and a fluctuating display that has already started will not be ended. .

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the small win opening flag is set on. As will be described in detail later, the small win open flag is turned on when the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, during the small win state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the process ends immediately. That is, while the central winning unit 37 is open (during a small winning state), a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, then in step S804, the setting status of the first display flag is checked to determine whether or not the special display device 43 is undergoing variable display. When the first displaying flag is set to on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed, and when the first displaying flag is turned off, it is considered that a variable display is not being performed. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display on the special display device 43 (see step S808), and is turned on when the variable display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S808). (see step S812).

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, the jackpot state is not in progress, the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state). If the special display device 43 is not in the state of change) or is not in the process of variable display on the special display device 43, the process advances to step S805, and the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold times in the change display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting winning section 33 is determined. Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variable display is stored on hold, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, processing for shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and from the second pending area to the pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area. In addition, in this shift process, not only the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, but also the values of the jackpot occurrence flag, the miss flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 second The on/off settings of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the following step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the fluctuation information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether or not the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. As a modified example, in the same way as the winning/failure judgment process of the starting winning process, the winning/failure random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is determined to be a value corresponding to a jackpot by once again considering the winning/failure judgment table. It may be determined whether or not the value is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if you win a "big hit" in the winning/failure lottery, then in step S902, a direct hit indicating that you have won a "jackpot" in the winning/failure lottery (a "direct jackpot"). Set the jackpot flag on. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is sent to send the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) also to the sub-control device 262. Configure settings. In the following step S905, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. Note that the first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a fluctuation pattern that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes a jackpot (jackpot shortening pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the subsequent step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "missing" by determining whether the outgoing flag in the execution area is set on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same way as the win/fail determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined whether the win/fail random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" or not, thereby determining whether or not the win is "lost". It may also be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that is an outlier (an outlier fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set to send the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262 as well. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern that results in a failure by shortening the fluctuation time (deviation shortened pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade release flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same manner as the propriety determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may also be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a long small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small win", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (a variation pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Further, in step S930, an opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a short small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 second. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that variable display is in progress on the special display device 43 is set on. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if an affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809, and a first display timer subtraction process is performed. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into account the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and the present process is ended. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) on the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, if it is time to stop the variable display on the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the subsequent step S813, a stop display setting is performed to perform a stop display on the special display device 43. Based on the settings of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output process in normal processing. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed in a stopped state (for example, lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a "miss" is displayed. If it is a "miss", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to "miss", if it is a "long small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to "long small win", and if it is a "short small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to "long small win". The display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short hit".

Furthermore, in the stop display setting process related to step S813, a setting process is performed to send a confirmation command to the sub-control device 262 to perform a stop display of the effect display device 42.

Then, in the subsequent step S814, after performing discrimination information setting processing, the present processing ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the direct hit jackpot flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/fail lottery, jackpot settings are performed from step S1002 onwards.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is in progress as a special gaming state is set on. In the subsequent step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in an open state is set on. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is turned on, the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer is set, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this example, "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter is set which indicates the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize state occurrences, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed). Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to "direct jackpot".

In the subsequent step S1006, a winning counter is set to count the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this example, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as the value. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the ball has entered the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there has been, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the win/fail lottery, the process moves to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time saving mode is such that after the end of the jackpot state, the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, and as described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process moves to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the variation counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the fourth variable display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", processing is performed to turn off the time reduction mode flag in step S1010, processing to turn on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot by considering the jackpot flag. If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the open time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process advances to step S1205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the prize winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 has reached a prescribed number per round (eight balls in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206, and it is determined whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and the present processing is ended. Details of the termination setting process will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the predetermined number, round forwarding processing is performed in step S1208, and the present processing ends. In the round feed process, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable prize winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of rounds executed reaches a prescribed number of times set in advance. Further, in the round sending process, the first variable flag is turned off and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set in the first variable timer.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer. Set the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8"). If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is placed in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state.

Here, the termination setting process in step S1207 will be explained with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time saving mode flag is set to ON. That is, in this embodiment, after the jackpot state of all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V prize winning jackpot ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot") ends. , and is configured to be provided with a time saving mode.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, the variation counter is set to "4", and then the process moves to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time reduction mode is maintained until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing is performed to turn off various jackpot flags. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether the blade opening flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not a small hit opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released due to a "small win" win, the process moves to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". As mentioned above, when it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer is set to a time corresponding to the same time as the variation time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43. (See step S919, step S923, step S926, step S930, step S934, and step S937). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, an affirmative determination is made in this determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to release the blade member 404 has arrived, the small winning opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Perform processing to make it open.

Thereafter, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1808, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1809, and this processing is ended.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing to close the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit opening flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade opening flag is turned off in step S1813. Then, in step S1814, the blade member 404 is brought into a closed state, and then the present process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 is capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in this embodiment a predetermined number of times (capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner). This constitutes an opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the through-gate display device 41 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the through-gate display device 41 is in the process of variable display (switching display). Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is performing a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the through gate display device 41 It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, in which the fluctuating display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display (switching display) on the through gate display device 41 is satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the through gate display device 41, and is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the through gate display device 41. It will be considered.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the variable display on the through gate display device 41 is different between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. Among the jackpots, for example, a specific jackpot gaming state or an opening period in which a specific gaming mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode can be provided after the end of a probability-variable jackpot may be set as a predetermined open gaming state. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. Furthermore, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the settings in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through gate display device 41.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the through gate display device 41, the process advances to step S2106, and a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display on the through gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process.

Note that, as described above, it is determined whether or not the winning result is based on the value of the input assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the input assist random number counter C3, "1 to 8" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process is performed to open and close the second start prize part 33b (start opening/closing member 33c). Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning part 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is different between the time shortening mode which is a high ball entry state and the normal mode. A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and in the normal mode, a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set to the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the startup winning section control process in step S209 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning section 33b is in the closed state), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the second start winning part 33b is in an open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2203, in which it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process moves to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

In addition, based on the on/off state of the second variable flag, various control signals are outputted to the second start winning part 33b in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning part 33b (starting port solenoid), and the second starting winning part 33b is in the open state. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting prize part 33b, and the second starting winning part 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the third display control process in step S210 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

First, in step S2301, the setting status of the third displaying flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display (switching display). Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is on, it is considered that the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display, and when the third display flag is off, the special gate display device 44 It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, in which the fluctuating display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2302, and it is determined whether the special gate passing flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not on, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passing flag is on, the process advances to step S2303 and the special gate passing flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 is satisfied. Specifically, the third display flag is turned on, and a third display timer setting process is performed. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the special gate display device 44, and is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the special gate display device 44. It will be considered.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is in the time reduction mode or the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second, which corresponds to 1 second for the third display timer. The value "250" is set.

Then, after step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, when a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process of the normal process, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, that is, if variable display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, the process advances to step S2306, and a third display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S2307, and it is determined whether the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If the determination in step S2307 is affirmative, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and in step S2309, a stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the special gate display device 44. Then, based on the settings of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the operation assist random number storage area. Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 15" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2310, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on and the operating time is set in the accessory operating timer.

The accessory in operation flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The accessory activation timer is a means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable accessory 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of the operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, then in step S2111 a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44, and the present process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 is realized at the timing of the third display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process of step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the accessory in operation flag indicating whether the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory object in operation flag is not on (the movable accessory object 722 is in the housed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the accessory operating flag is on, it is assumed that the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state, and the accessory operating timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2403, in which it is determined whether or not the specified projection time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the accessory activation timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2403 when the predetermined projection time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2403 is affirmative, the process moves to step S2404, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2404, a process of turning off the accessory operating flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the accessory operating flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism section 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the next external output process of normal processing. When the accessory operating flag is on, a drive signal that turns the movable accessory solenoid 725 into an excited state is output, and the movable accessory 722 becomes in a protruding state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal that turns the movable accessory solenoid 725 into a de-energized state is output, and the movable accessory 722 is placed in the housed state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entering detection switch 437, and is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entering detection switch 437, and the non-special ball entering detection switch 462, the 15R ball entering detection switch 734, and the 7R ball entering detection switch. 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and special gate switch 651, 1 is subtracted based on the detection.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if there are no game balls remaining in the internal area 401, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of a monitoring timer for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball last entered the internal area 401. It is determined whether or not is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7103, and then the process ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the inner area 401, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball enters the inner area 401. In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the internal area 401 until it is ejected (specifically, from when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437 to when the game ball is ejected) The time required for detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or special gate switch 651 is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds. seconds.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, that is, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0'', it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred in the internal area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will first be explained with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main process will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received, but for example, the timer shown in FIG. In interrupt processing, before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 and the command is executed. The reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the subsequent step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if an abnormality in backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step S3115 onward. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power outage occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step S3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is checked after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process in step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and set the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 36. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full status setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full status is released. Perform state settings. Further, in step S3206, a tank ball absent state (bulb out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state and the no-tank-bulb release state are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. In addition, as mentioned above, the starting command includes whether the variable display is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning section 33, the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (starting winning determination flag). setting), information indicating whether the fluctuation information corresponds to a jackpot (setting of the jackpot occurrence flag), information indicating whether the fluctuation display corresponds to a long small win or a short small win (long small win occurrence flag or short small win). information indicating whether or not the fluctuating display corresponds to a miss (setting of a hit occurrence flag), information indicating whether the fluctuating display corresponds to a miss (setting a miss flag), and the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display (2 second fluctuating flag, 3 second fluctuating flag, 7 second fluctuating flag). flag, and information indicating the setting of the 0.1 second fluctuation flag).

Further, the hold information storage area, like the special variable hold area of the main controller 261, includes four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, variation information included in the preceding command is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variation display (information stored in the special variation pending area). By employing this configuration, the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261.

Here, the pending information storage process in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on fluctuation time, etc. included in the first command is stored in the first vacant holding area of the holding information storage area. Store in area. Thereafter, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After performing the process in step S4104, or if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process moves to step S4105, and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command has been received (or whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). whether or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, one is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Np in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding information storage area to the execution area side, from the first holding area to the execution area. , the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reservation area → first reservation area, third reservation area → second reservation area, fourth reservation area → third reservation area.

After performing the process in step S4107, or if a negative determination is made in step S4105, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process moves to step S3904, and it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variable pattern command. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

The display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of a variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a jackpot, and the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The necessary display commands are generated each time based on the information. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 can be roughly divided into a group of normal variable data, a group of reach effect data, etc., and basically each data constituting these data groups is linked to the variable time timer. By sequentially outputting the data in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the , display effects are performed according to various fluctuation patterns. For example, the normal variation data group consists of normal variation data 1, normal variation data 2, ..., normal variation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., reach effect data. n, data output is performed sequentially in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and then, with the start of reach performance, reach performance data 1 → 2 → Data output is performed sequentially in the order of ...→n.

The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display etc. on the effect display device 42. Note that once the variable pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the effect display is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variable display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

In step S3906, it is also confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "4" is set in the variation counter in the termination setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command containing that fact is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, if the sub-control device 262 receives an operation notice command output from the main control device 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 is activated. It may also be configured to perform an operation warning performance that foretells that it is extremely hot time.

For example, the movable accessory 722 is better when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603 or by the effect of notifying that the movable accessory 722 will operate after how many seconds. There will be performances to notify you that it will be activated at certain times.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the presentation performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display presentation performed by the presentation display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed without a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 being performed on the effect display device 42) Performs other processing such as control settings for display).

In step 3910, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps S3905 to 3909. For example, when causing the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3910, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process moves to step S3911, and it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step S3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the gaming area enters the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), and When a small win is won in the lottery based on the entered ball, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entering opening 403 remains open for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is in the open state, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 passes through the introduction passage 601 to the fall passage 602. You will be guided to.

The destination of the game ball that has fallen down the falling path 602 is a normal guide path 604 that can be guided to the win/fail lottery area 407 or a special guide path 605 that can be guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 by the route distribution member 603. be distributed to.

However, under normal conditions, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right and closes the special guide path 605 on the right side, so the game ball falling down the falling path 602 is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. It will be destroyed.

Then, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the game ball that comes into contact with it. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the falling path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605.

The game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are guided to the win/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

Thereafter, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408, and is used to determine the jackpot type. Then, after the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state starts.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guide path 605 is guided to the accessory activation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an activation assist lottery is performed, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide path 604 and the bypass passage 737 are brought into communication via the second V winning passage 730 within the movable accessory 722.

When a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) will be granted.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot starts.

In other words, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (projecting state), the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 directly enters the 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741. It will be guided to the ball mouth 731.

The main effects of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401. Particularly in this embodiment, when the movable accessory 722 is activated, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the expectation of the occurrence of a V-winning jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an operation assist that determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is provided. A lottery is held, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate if a winner is won in the operation assist lottery.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not move regularly or continuously, and does not move every time when the special gate switch 651 detects a ball entering the ball. It is possible to suppress monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable accessory 722.

In addition, by providing the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 with an opportunity ball entering means (special gate 650) that detects the movement opportunity of the movable accessory 722, based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401, Since it is configured to determine whether or not the movable accessory 722 will be in an advantageous state, the player will be able to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401, and is configured to be unable to flow down (ball cannot enter) into the first V winning passage 427 or the like. If the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. There is. As a result, the result of the action of the movable accessory 722 will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable accessory 722 are likely to be carried out. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427 etc. via the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650 may be obstructed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the various problems described above. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is guided to the normal guide path 604 that can guide the destination to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) is provided with a route distribution member 603 that distributes the route to a special guide path 605 that can guide the route.

For example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, the first game ball that precedes is guided to the normal guide path 604, and the second game ball that follows The ball is guided to a special guide path 605. As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, it becomes possible to direct the game balls to both the normal guide path 604 and the special guide path 605, so that the movable accessory 722 The effects of this will be more successful.

However, in this embodiment, under the configuration in which the game ball is fired by the firing device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds at the time of a "short hit", At the time of a "long small hit", the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, it is advantageous for the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 in succession during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state. The configuration is such that the situation is unlikely to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the varying time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to "1 second", and "4 seconds" is set as the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation.

As a result, for example, other game balls may not enter the central prize unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650, or other game balls may enter the central prize unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650. Even if the game ball does not win the V prize, the game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 afterwards are given a chance to win the V prize with a higher probability.

In other words, the probability is higher for game balls other than game balls that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404). The structure is such that you will be given a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, two game balls enter the internal area 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), and the first game ball (first identified) enters the internal area 401. The game ball that passed through the entrance section 601b as a region) flows down into the normal guide path 604, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the entrance section 601b next) flows down into the special guide path 605. , After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide path 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide path 604 passes the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 does not operate yet and the game ball that has flown down to the normal guide path 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win a V prize, the center winning unit 37 (wing member During the next open state period of 404), the game ball that entered the internal area 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance section 601 next) flows down to the normal guide path 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722, You will be given a chance to win the V prize.

Of course, in place of the above configuration, the variation time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating), the operating time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. , a game in which various setting times are set to times different from the above-mentioned setting times, and a predetermined game ball enters the inner area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. The ball may flow down into the normal guide path 604, and the action of the movable accessory 722 may provide a chance to win a V prize.

With this configuration, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, the player can actively try to enter the game ball into the central winning unit 37. It becomes possible to do this. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of a type in which a jackpot state (direct jackpot) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning section 33. It has the functions of a gaming machine (so-called former Type 1 Pachinko machine), and a central winning unit 37 that becomes open when a small winning is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning section 33. It has the functions of a type of gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball that enters the unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427, etc., and a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) occurs. This is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixer.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. The gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) awarded during a jackpot, and a gaming mode such as a high probability mode awarded after the jackpot. In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33. , a type of gaming machine in which the central winning unit 37 is opened and the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the 1V winning passage 427, etc., resulting in a jackpot (so-called old type 2 pachinko). It may be implemented as a machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be adopted in which a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means opens and closes to generate a jackpot state. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 32 is omitted. In other words, it is a type of game in which a jackpot state occurs in which a predetermined variable ball entry means (big winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the entry of balls into a predetermined starting ball entry means. In the machine, a movable body may be provided in an internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, the game ball is provided with a variable ball entry means such as a central winning unit 37 that becomes open when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, and a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. The game machine may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is awarded when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. That is, in this type of gaming machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, the game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b that constitutes the specific area, and enters the right ball entry opening 403. The game ball that enters the specific area always passes through the right entrance part 601b that constitutes the specific area, and the game ball that enters the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right internal ball entrance that constitutes a predetermined detection means. It is always detected by the switch 437. However, the various configurations related to the specific area and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific area and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configurations related to the entrance section 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437, Other configurations may also be adopted. For example, one or more specific areas or a predetermined detection means may be set as a specific area and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is set as a specific area. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided at a position different from that of the portion 601b.

Furthermore, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and its pair of left and right entrances 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the ball entry opening 403 on the left side (including the left wing member 404, the left side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the left inlet portion 601b) may be omitted, and the ball entry opening 403 on the right side (including the left wing member 404, the left side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the left side thereof) may be omitted. 404, the right side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the right side thereof) may be provided. As a result, there is one ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and which can guide the game balls one by one to the exit section 601a, which is a specific area provided only in one place. The configuration is provided only for In other words, the game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the inner area 401 through the exit portion 601a. Further, the ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) is provided at a position where only game balls that are fired with a predetermined intensity (hit right) and jump over the center winning unit 37 can pass through.

Instead of or in addition to this, at an outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one side (for example, right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 etc. on the one side (one side A ball path (such as a ball path member having a ball path) that can guide game balls one by one to the side blade member 404, one side portion of the introduction path 601, and the entrance portion 601b on that one side is provided. It is also possible to have a different configuration.

In addition, in specific areas such as the exit part 601a and the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing game balls to pass in a predetermined direction (inner area 401 side), game balls in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction are allowed to pass through. It may be configured to include a regulating means (such as a valve-like member whose state changes from the first state to the second state depending on the force received from the game ball) for regulating the passage of the game ball.

The winning probabilities for various types of lottery (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) related to the pachinko machine 10 are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . Furthermore, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states include a "3 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times. ) is repeated 15 times, which is a "15 round jackpot", but this is not limiting, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time of the variable display (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. However, the period for which the time saving mode is applied is not limited to this. For example, the time saving mode may be continued after the jackpot state ends until the next jackpot state occurs.

Furthermore, as the game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the probability of winning the jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) is high. A specific game mode such as a time saving mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. When a jackpot that has the right to be given a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot state, a so-called probability variable jackpot, occurs, a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 or the like in a specific manner corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. It's okay. Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine configured such that the time reduction mode, high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the activation assist lottery conducted based on the passing of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 are explained. The probability is configured to be the same in all modes.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction mode or the above-mentioned high probability mode, the winning probability of the entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a mode (high support mode) may be implemented in which the probability of winning (especially long small win) is higher than the normal mode. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the accessory activation lottery (accessory activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory activation lottery area 409, whether to activate the movable accessory 722 or not. An operation assist lottery is held to determine the operation assist lottery, and when a winner is won in the operation assist lottery, the operation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

For example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing a lottery process, the operating condition is always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated.

In addition, it may be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, the activation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is activated. good. Alternatively, it is provided with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, a predetermined lottery process is executed to obtain a predetermined lottery result. In this case, the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate when the operating condition is satisfied.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not performed by a software lottery process, but by providing a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a croon in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery is drawn based on the behavior of the game balls. However, it is preferable to perform the lottery process using software in order to simplify the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the accessory activation lottery area 409, the game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls can (or do not) pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate. You can also use it as

(d-3) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an opportunity entry means (special gate) for detecting an operation opportunity of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be at a different position.

For example, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a second internal area different from the internal area 401 (an area where the ball can enter from a different entrance than the ball entry opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404), and the second internal area is A configuration may also be adopted in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the internal area.

(d-4) Also, like the through gate 34, an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter (pass through). It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, the structure related to the opportunity ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, but can also be used for entry means such as a prize opening through which the entered game ball is ejected out of the gaming area. Ball means may also be used. Then, a predetermined operating condition is met, such as when a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined winning opening, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable accessory 722 is activated when the condition is established. For example, as will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning parts 33a, 33b (starting winning switches 224a, 224b) during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. It may be configured such that when the activation assist lottery is held and the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is activated.

In addition, the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, after which it is placed on the back side of the game board 30. Instead of being ejected to the central winning unit 37, it may be configured to return to the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37.

In addition, the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) and is guided to the special guide path 605 passes through the special guide path 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detection means, The ball is configured to be able to return to the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37 and then enter an opportunity ball entry means (such as a special gate) provided in the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37, where the ball enters the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37. It may be configured such that it can be detected by a detection means (such as a special gate switch).

However, if the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 is located outside the central winning unit 37, the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate switch) is provided using a wire or the like. From this point of view, it is recommended that the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) be disposed within the central winning unit 37, since there is a risk that a fraudulent act of erroneously detecting the ball and activating the movable accessory 722 may be carried out. is more preferable.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display starts on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, the display stops in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. is carried out, and if the lottery result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result, the movable accessory 722 is configured to be activated thereafter.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery results of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the variation time of the variation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a configuration.

For example, the main control device 261 includes a variable pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different display times, and a variable pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns based on the detection of a game ball by the special gate switch 651. and a fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns, and controlling the special gate display device 44 based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means. Good too.

Thereby, the varying time from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. Furthermore, the operation start period from when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 until the movable accessory 722 actually enters the operating state (advantageous state) can be made variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651. Even so, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) is not suspended. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the configuration is such that the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display or the movable accessory 722 is in operation, a predetermined number of times It may also be configured to include a holding means (variable holding area) that can hold the variable display (operation assist lottery result) of minutes.

Here, the holding means (fluctuating holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, similar to, for example, the normal changing holding area that stores the value of the input assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. , the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of holding areas in chronological order according to the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to only the value of the operation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route distribution member 603 of the above embodiment is pivotally supported in a swingable manner, and is normally maintained in a rightward tilted state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown), so that the route distribution member 603 of the above embodiment is tilted to the right. The falling game ball is in a state where it can flow down to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. In this state, when a game ball falling down the falling path 602 is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 is moved by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614. , rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means, and is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time, allowing game balls falling down the falling path 602 to flow down to the special guide path 605 on the right side. It is configured to be in a state.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 protrudes toward the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a, and as shown in FIG. The route distribution member 603 is provided with an action piece 800 extending downward from the rear end, and a pair of coil springs 801 and 802 as a maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from left and right sides. The center piece 613 may be configured to be maintained in an equilibrium state (reference posture) with no horizontal inclination at the center position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610).

With this configuration, when a game ball falls to the route distribution member 603 which is normally in an equilibrium state, the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side or to the special guide path on the right side. I am not sure whether I will be directed to 605 or not.

When a game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided, for example, to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the route distribution member 603 moves away from the game ball that contacts the right side portion 615. Due to the received force, the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 is turned clockwise and becomes the first state (first posture), that is, the right tilted state [see FIG. 41(a)]. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters the left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). Thereafter, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, such as once again being tilted to the right, and then returns to the balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802.

Similarly, when a game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 Due to the force received from the coil springs 801 and 802, the coil springs 801 and 802 rotate clockwise and tilt to the right after being rotated counterclockwise and tilted to the left. After that, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, such as once again being tilted to the left, and then returns to the balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802.

Under such a configuration, when two game balls fall successively to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state, for example, when the first game ball in front is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. In this case, the second subsequent game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the first game ball in advance is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the second game ball that follows is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side.

In addition, according to the above configuration, a plurality of continuously falling game balls can be alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

(e-2) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a weight is attached to the lower end of the operating piece 800, so that the route distribution member 603 is normally The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be able to freely swing while maintaining an equilibrium state due to the action of the game ball.

(e-3) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, in place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a drive means (distribution drive means) such as a motor for swinging the route distribution member 603 is provided, The route distribution member 603 may be configured to swing periodically or continuously between a rightward tilt state and a leftward tilted state. Alternatively, the route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 is normally in a stopped state, and may be configured to enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is achieved.

(e-4) The route distribution means does not have to be movable, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like or provided integrally with the housing 400, for example. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which routes are distributed based on random behavior of game balls. In addition, various other configurations related to the route distribution means, such as the location and number of route distribution devices provided, are not limited to the above embodiments, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which one or more route distribution means are provided at a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(f) The configurations of various guide routes are not limited to the above embodiments.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is From the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate from the time when the movable object reaches the movable accessory 722 (the exit part 604a of the normal guide path 604). 650 (special gate switch 651) and the movable accessory 722 is preferably configured to reach an advantageous state in a short time.

If the time required for the game ball to reach the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide path 604) from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603 is longer than the route It is configured such that the time required to reach an advantageous state from the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 by the distribution member 603 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous is made longer. If so, two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, the first game ball in the lead is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the following game ball is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603. When the second game ball is sorted to the special guide path 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated. , there is a risk that interest will decrease significantly.

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, it is possible to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the normal guide path 604. Conceivable. Further, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide path 604.

Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

(f-2) For example, in the above embodiment, the second route (opportunity entry ball guidance route) for guiding the game balls sorted by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity entry means (special gate) is to guide the game balls to the special gate. Although the configuration is such that only one special guide path 605 is provided to guide the ball to the route 650, the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a plurality of different second routes (opportunity entry guidance routes).

By providing a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in the operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution member 603 (predetermined trigger). The period of time until this happens can be made variable.

Further, according to the above configuration, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game balls. This allows the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, thereby further increasing interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 604a), from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first opportunity ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory The first second route (first special guide passage 605A) that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state until 722 is activated and the advantageous state that leads to the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) It may also be configured to include a second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short arrival time. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first downstream route", and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "first downstream route". It constitutes a "second downstream route" (the same applies hereafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the first special gate 650A is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough, and the second special gate 650B is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough. A second special gate switch 651B for detection is provided. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first opportunity ball entry detection means", and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second opportunity ball entry detection means" ( Same below).

The passage width of each special guide passage 605A, 605B and special gate 650A, 650B is set to a width that allows one game ball to pass through. Furthermore, the game balls that have passed through each of the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged to the outside of the internal area 401 via a discharge passage (not shown).

Further, a slide member 655 that can open and close the entrance portion is provided at the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and by moving to the forward protruding position, the slide member 655 enters a closed state in which the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and returns to the rearward retracted position. By being displaced, the second special guide passage 605B is brought into an open state in which the entrance portion is opened.

When the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 serving as the upstream route distribution means pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and enter the first special guide path. You will be guided to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 are guided to the second special guide path 605B.

Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the slide member 655 constantly repeats the sliding displacement operation, or a configuration in which the state of the slide member 655 is changed periodically or randomly. Further, in the specific state, the rate at which the slide member 655 is in the open state and the rate at which it is in the closed state may be controlled to be different.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route changing means (downstream route distributing means) in this embodiment, and changes the destination of the game ball to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or " It is possible to change to the second route (second special guide passage 605B). Note that the route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

When a game ball is detected by each of the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an activation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate each movable accessory 722. Here, if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined period of time. In addition, in a specific state, the probability of winning in the actuation assist lottery is different depending on whether the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A or the case where the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. You can also use it as In other words, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in the predetermined operating state differs depending on the case.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, by protruding ribs 653A and 653B in the first special guide passage 605A, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , the game ball is configured to advance forward over time while stopping the momentum of the game ball.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the ribs 653A and 653B, other delaying means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage, a croon, etc., where the game ball reciprocates in the same place several times, or moves forward after going around the same place) It is also possible to arrange a mechanism such as this in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A, 650B (special gate switches 651A, 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B. However, instead of this, the game balls passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B move toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special It may also be configured to be detected by a gate switch.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always flows down to the first special gate 650A (first special guide passage 605A). If the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball must pass through the second special gate 650B (second special guide passage 605B). 2 special gate switch 651B), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls may pass through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as opportunity ball entry means at a predetermined rate. It is also possible to have a configuration that allows (or does not pass). In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" The rate at which the game ball can pass through the opportunity ball entry means (the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state) may be configured to be different depending on the case where it flows down.

(f-3) A configuration with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the route exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above. The configuration related to the distribution member 603 will be more successful.

If the route distributing member 603 guides the game ball to the special guide path, the route distributing member 603 takes longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable object 722 from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 to the time when the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. If the game ball is configured to take a long time to reach the advantageous state from the time it is guided to the special gate 605 until the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the first game ball is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball is distributed to the special guide path. 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing at which the movable accessory 722 is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the normal guide path 604, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

On the other hand, the route distributing member 603 allows the game ball to be guided by the special guide rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable object 722 from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distributing member 603. If the game ball is configured to reach an advantageous state from the time it is guided to the passage 605 until it reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the first game ball is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is normally guided. When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. Because it becomes clear that the player is going to do something, there is a risk that interest in the game will drop significantly.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the special guide path 605, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes) as described above, two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, Regardless of whether the second game ball is sorted into the normal guide path 604 or the special guide path 605, the second game ball that follows is sorted into the “first second route (the first route) which takes a long time to reach an advantageous state”. The timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball depend on whether the movable accessory 722 is activated or the game ball Since there is still a possibility that the timing of the ball reaching the movable accessory 722 coincides with the timing, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with a sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur.

(g) The configuration related to the win/fail lottery (win/fail lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as a success/failure sorting means. The rotating body 414 includes one special pocket part 416a for jackpots and two non-special pocket parts 416b for losers, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

For example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotary body 414 may be changed to vary the winning probability of the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In addition, the rotating body 414 is provided with a special pocket part 416a for 3R jackpots and a special pocket part 416a for 7R jackpots, for example, and a jackpot type lottery is also performed in the win/fail lottery area 407. You can also use it as In such a case, the configuration may be such that the type lottery area 408 is omitted.

(g-3) Instead of the rotary body 414, a configuration may be provided in which another lottery mechanism such as a croon is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) The type lottery area 408 has a type sorting means (type determining means) that allocates the destination of the game ball to any of the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

In place of the type sorting mechanism section 741, a configuration may be adopted in which another type lottery mechanism such as a clone is provided.

(h-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted, and the type of jackpot condition to be awarded may be determined when a game ball enters a special entry means such as the first V winning passage 427, for example. In other words, the configuration may be such that the type determination for determining the type of jackpot state is performed by software determination processing.

(i) The configurations of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, the configuration may be such that the route distribution area 406 (route distribution member 603) and the accessory activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) are omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball entry is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722.

However, if the movable accessory 722 is only configured to perform a predetermined action based on ball entry detection by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a game in which the ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 The movable accessory 722 moves with respect to the ball at the same timing every time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to also employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration that makes the fluctuation time variable as described above.

(j) The configuration of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (position, shape, operating mode, advantageous state, etc.) is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. Instead, other configurations such as an opening/closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above embodiment is in the operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism section 741. , is configured so that game balls normally guided to the guide path 604 can be guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731.

In other words, when the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is configured so that it is easier to win the V prize jackpot than when the movable accessory 722 is in an inactive state (non-advantageous state). At the same time, the game ball is configured to easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot which is the most advantageous for the player among the multiple types of special gaming states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot). ing.

The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, avoiding only the lottery by the rotary body unit 410. .

(j-2) Also, a movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type distribution mechanism section 741 is avoided and the game ball is placed in the 15R ball entry hole. The configuration may be such that the user is guided to 731.

(j-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotary body 414, which normally rotates at a constant speed, changes its state to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and the special pocket part 416a for jackpot is placed in a position corresponding to the gate part 435. Alternatively, the special jackpot portion 416a may be configured to move at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 is provided with, for example, a special pocket part 416a for 3R jackpot, a special pocket part 416a for 7R jackpot, and a special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot, and the rotating body 414 is (Non-advantageous state), the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot is controlled to move at a very high speed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435, and the game ball is moved against the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot. makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is in an advantageous state, the special pocket part 416a for the 15R jackpot is temporarily placed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435. It is also possible to perform control such that the special pocket section 416a for the 15R jackpot moves at a normal speed to a position corresponding to the gate section 435.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism section 741 (first spanning board 744, second spanning board 745) may be used as a movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first transition plate 744 and the second transition plate 745, which normally swing, change to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the forward position, or A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entry port 731 by increasing the amount of time spent at the forward position.

(j-6) Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism section 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined based on the lottery result of a predetermined operation lottery process. In this way, when the movable body is brought into the operating state (advantageous state), the operating pattern determining means in this embodiment is configured by the function of determining which of the plurality of operating patterns is to be executed.

Furthermore, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to be in a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured so that it is easier to enter the special ball entry means (V winning passages 427, 730, etc.) and it is easier to hit the V winning jackpot than in the case. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to be in a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined type of special gaming state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is more likely to occur among the plurality of types of special gaming states (for example, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the case where a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, the effect of the effect display device 42 etc. is displayed during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is activated. The means may be configured to be able to perform an opening performance as a preliminary performance that suggests that the movable accessory 722 will be in an operating state.

Incidentally, such opening performance is performed after the stop display when a variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which no variable display is performed), the lottery is performed after the winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, the main control device 261 or the sub-control device 262 includes a performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, and a performance pattern storage unit that stores a plurality of performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, a performance pattern selection means that is capable of selecting one of the plurality of performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means, and the performance pattern selection means selects one from among the plurality of performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means. The present invention may also include a performance control means that can control a predetermined performance means based on the created performance pattern.

With this configuration, the operation start period (for example, opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when an operation condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

(k-2) Without performing a performance such as the above-mentioned opening performance, the operation start period from a predetermined opportunity (for example, when an activation condition is established) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes in an advantageous state may be made variable. .

For example, the main control device 261 includes an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that determine the operation start period from the establishment of the operation condition until the movable accessory 722 enters the operation state, and a special gate switch 651 that controls the game ball. an actuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of actuation patterns stored in the actuation pattern storage means based on the detected actuation pattern; The movable accessory 722 may be controlled based on the control means.

(l) In addition to the game performance using movable bodies such as the movable accessory 722, it may be configured to perform other game performances.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the 1st V winning passage 427 etc., the ejection route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entry detection switch 462) or the special guide passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ) The configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of game balls discharged outside the internal area 401 via the player. The functions of the main control device 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute a specific processing execution means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning passage 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are utilized to provide new gameplay. This makes it possible to dramatically increase the interest of players.

(l-2) For example, it is equipped with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means (discharged ball detecting means) such as the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or the special gate switch 651, and the counted value is set to a predetermined value. The predetermined condition is met if the count is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, or the predetermined condition is met if the predetermined lottery result is obtained by executing a predetermined lottery process when the counted value is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. , the configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player is executed.

In addition, such specific processing includes, for example, processing to lengthen the time that the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state when it is in the operating state, processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, and special pocket part of the rotating body 414. 416a, processing to make it easier to enter the game ball, processing to make it easier for the game ball to be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731 in the type lottery area 408, etc.

(m) The small winning opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the jackpot opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. It's not a thing.

(m-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 has two opening/closing patterns of "short small hit" and "long small hit", but this is not limited to this. It may be configured with one or more opening/closing patterns.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win". However, the single opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and a configuration may be provided with other opening modes having different opening times.

(m-3) In the above embodiment, the blade member Although the configuration is such that the opening/closing operation (opening operation) of the blade member 404 is performed only once (one round), the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 may be performed two or more times (multiple rounds) for one small hit occurrence. Round)

(m-4) For example, a first opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (one round), and a second opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (two rounds). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of opening/closing patterns having different numbers of opening/closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, as in the configuration with the above-described configuration. However, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (for example, a long small hit that is open for 1.5 seconds) is performed, and if the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short hit that is open for 0.5 seconds), It is preferable that the movable object such as the movable accessory 722 be configured to be more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than in the case where a small win is made.

(n) In consideration of the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the above embodiment is configured to perform the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212). In addition, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is releasing a small win, and if it is releasing a small win, a new variable display may be started. The configuration is such that the variable display that has already started is not terminated.

Instead of or in addition to these configurations, a game ball is detected by the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) while the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is releasing a small hit. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot lottery and the small win lottery are not executed. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery invalidation period is set.

In addition, in consideration of the period for discharging the remaining balls, the lottery invalid period includes, in addition to the period in which the feather member 404 is opened in the open game state (the small winning period), after the opening period ends (the period in which the feather member 404 is opened). It may also include a predetermined period of time (after closure). Of course, the lottery invalidation period is not limited to this, and may be a period different from this. For example, the period from when the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 until the opening of small winnings is started may also be included in the lottery invalidation period. In addition, in a type of gaming machine where a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during the opening/closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalidation period is such that the predetermined opening/closing of the variable ball entry means is performed. It may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which it is being executed.

In the pachinko machine for which the lottery invalidation period has been set, for example, before starting the start-up winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery is in the invalidation period, and if it is the lottery invalidation period, the start-up In the prize-winning process, only the payout setting of the prize balls (setting of the prize ball command) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process moves to the start winning process.

In addition, when adopting such a configuration, in place of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalidation period, the startup prize section 33 (first startup prize section 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the accessory 722 is activated.

In addition, when performing the operation assist lottery related to the starting winning part 33, it is also possible to omit the accessory operation lottery area 409 (the special gate 650 and the special gate switch 651) and the configuration related thereto.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11, an example of the starting winning pre-processing that can be executed before starting the starting winning processing in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48.

First, in step S7700, a predetermined flag or the like is referred to to determine whether or not the lottery is in an invalid lottery period. In this example, the small winning opening period of the central winning unit 37 and the predetermined period after the end of the small winning opening period are set as the lottery invalidation period. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the lottery invalidation period, this process is directly terminated, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, then in step S7701, the first This is determined based on the detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S7701, the process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, the third displaying flag is turned on in step S7702. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, the process is immediately terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory object in operation flag is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory object 722 is in operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting winning process in step S304.

As a result, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, and the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b. Even if it is detected by the winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, the activation assist lottery is invalidated and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a new game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, and the first starting winning section 33b enters the first starting winning section 33a. It may be configured to include a holding means (variation holding area) that can hold a predetermined number of variable displays (operation assist lottery results) when detected by the winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b.

Here, the holding means (fluctuation holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of In the plurality of holding areas, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 are displayed in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls to the starting winning parts 33a and 33b. The configuration may be such that the information is stored in . Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to only the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7703, in step S7704, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are set to the lottery invalidation set in the RAM 503. Store in the random number storage area for the period.

In the subsequent step S7705, the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is a value corresponding to the assist winning. A validity determination process is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to an assist win, that is, when an actuation assist win is achieved, this corresponds to a case where the predetermined condition in this example is satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the lottery is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalidation period. Specifically, among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 5" are the winning values. In other words, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the assisted winning is performed with a different probability of winning.

In the following step S7707, a variable time is determined based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period to determine the variable time in the invalid period display device (not shown) constituting the second display means. A determination process is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S7707 constitutes the second fluctuation pattern selection means in this example.

Note that the correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time on the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the lottery invalid period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is one of "0 to 2" from "0 to 9", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 3 seconds. If the value is one of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9", , the variable time of the variable display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the invalid period display device will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the fourth display control process constitutes the second display control means in this example.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display by checking the setting status of the fourth display flag indicating whether the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display. . Specifically, when the fourth display flag is on, it is assumed that the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display, and when the fourth display flag is off, the display device for the invalid period is considered to be displaying a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. The invalid period display device and the special gate display device 44 may be shared.

If a negative determination is made in step S7801, the process advances to step S7802, and it is determined whether or not the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalidation period is on. If a negative determination is made in step S7802, that is, if the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalidation period is not on, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the starting prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is not in the fluctuating display and is on, the process advances to step S7803, and the starting winning prize determining flag for the lottery invalid period is turned off. In the following step S7804, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display on the invalid period display device is satisfied. Specifically, the fourth display flag is turned on, and the fourth display timer is set. The fourth display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device, and is used as a reference when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the variation time determined in the variation time determination process of step S7707 is set in the fourth display timer. That is, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, the value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the fourth display timer.

Then, after step S7804 ends, the fourth display control process ends. Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of normal processing, the invalid period display device The variable display starts at .

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, that is, if variable display is being performed on the invalid period display device, the process advances to step S7806, and a fourth display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S7807, and it is determined whether the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7807, the fourth displaying flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809, a stop display setting is performed to perform a stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the invalid period display device in the external output process in the next normal process.

Next, the process advances to step S7810, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory object operation flag is turned on, and the operation time is set in the accessory object operation timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer. Thereby, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The movable object control means in this example is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that performs driving processing of the movable accessory 722 based on the setting contents.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7807, then in step S7811, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process in normal processing. As a result, variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4), the validity determination process in step S7706, etc. constitute the actuation lottery process (actuation assist lottery) in this example, and the main control that executes this actuation lottery process The functions of the device 261 constitute lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

Further, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the variable time selection counter C2), the variable time determination process in step S7707, etc. constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period in which the central winning unit 37 is made to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period. The subsequent predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalidation period, and when a game ball newly enters the starting winning part 33 during the lottery invalidation period, it is determined whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. An operation assist lottery is held to determine the operation assist, and if a winner is won in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, the movable accessory 722 can be operated in a predetermined manner by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning part 33. Advantageous conditions may arise.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting winning part 33, if it is found that the gaming ball will not win a V prize at the opening timing of the central winning unit 37 related to the starting ball, the center In order to prevent game balls from entering the start winning section 33 unnecessarily during the opening period of the winning unit 37, some players temporarily stop firing the game balls at that point.

On the other hand, according to this example, after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33, even in such a situation, the player can newly start winning in order to receive assistance from the movable accessory 722. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the section 33, a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

Further, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 is during the open period of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to diversify the games.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In addition, under the configuration according to this example, if a relatively small value is set for the accessory activation timer and the fourth display timer, immediately after the game ball enters the starting winning part 33 during the predetermined lottery invalidation period. The movable accessory 722 becomes operational, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to be able to act on the game ball that entered the central winning unit 37 during the small winning release before the lottery invalidation period.

On the other hand, if a relatively large value is set for the accessory activation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable accessory 722 will be activated for game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 after the end of the predetermined lottery invalidation period. It becomes a configuration that can work. As a result, even if a game ball does not exist in the internal area 401 of the center winning unit 37 at the time when the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 within the lottery invalidation period, the center that is opened at a predetermined timing thereafter The movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball that has entered the winning unit 37, and a chance to win a prize is given.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the starting winning unit 33 within the lottery invalidation period, the player may actively try to enter the gaming ball into the central winning unit 37. It becomes possible to play games. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional issue A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the movable body periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation unrelated to the game, or the movable body The effects related to the movable body became monotonous, such as the player performing a predetermined action, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tended to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means A1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means provided to allow the game ball to enter (or pass through);
an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
At least a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined action to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Moreover, in this means, it is configured to determine by lottery whether or not the movable body is to be brought into a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, for example, the movable body does not perform regular or continuous operations, and it also eliminates the need to perform predetermined actions every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, such as when the variable ball entrance means is in an open state. , it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body.

Particularly, in this means, decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state are made by software by the lottery processing execution means (operation lottery processing). Thereby, there is no need to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism that performs a lottery based on the behavior of the game balls, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, the placement position of the "opportunistic ball entry means" includes, for example, "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means", "in a region different from the internal region of the variable ball entry means", and "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means". ``within the gaming area outside the variable ball entry means.''

Means A2. The game machine according to means A1, wherein the opportunity ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter after passing through the specific area.

According to the above means A2, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting a motion trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area can be adjusted. Based on this, it is determined whether the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which increases the interest. It is possible to improve the

In addition, if the triggered ball entry means (triggered ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), the triggered ball entry detection means can be used using a wire or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as causing the device to make a false positive detection and activating the movable body may be more likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the above means A3, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means A4. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means A4, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

In addition, "a first flow route (first route) that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means; and a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means. In the case of a configuration including a second downstream route (the second said first route) that allows the ball to flow down to the special entrance means with a higher probability than the downstream route (the first said first route), the overall As a result, the proportion of game balls that flow down to the special ball entry means increases. must be set, which may reduce interest for players.

Means A5. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above means A5 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened and closed during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

In addition, the structure related to the above means A5 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after a stop display is made on the display means.

If the movable body suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been paying attention to the movable body until then may not be able to grasp the situation and may become confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance using the movable body, and to further improve the interest for the players.

Means A7. Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different times of the fluctuation display;
Variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
The gaming machine according to means A6, further comprising display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the above means A7, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means A8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means A9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means A1 to A8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means A10. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means A11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means A1 to A10 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means A11, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, effects related to the movable body, such as the movable body periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, are The game became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movable body tended to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means B1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means B1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting an action trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. As a result, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In addition, if the triggered ball entry means (triggered ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), the triggered ball entry detection means can be used using a wire or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as causing the device to make a false positive detection and activating the movable body may be more likely to occur.

In contrast, according to the present means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Means B2. comprising a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The game machine according to means B1, characterized in that the opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can enter. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body will operate at the same timing every time with respect to a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means (internal area). I will do it.

As a result, the performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the timing of the operation of the movable body is easily grasped by the player, and there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means B2, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Means B3. comprising an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be satisfied when a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

According to the means B3, it is not necessary to perform a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
and a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

According to the means B4, the determination as to whether or not to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means B5. The game according to any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means B5, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means B6. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means B6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Means B7. The game machine according to means B6, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a plurality of the second routes configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route allocating means is different.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, "the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball that passes through each of the "plurality of second routes". may be configured to move toward a single ball opportunity entry means (original ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same opportunity ball entry detection means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. a first route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means B6, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enters the game ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. When game balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball ahead is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest. .

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

Means B9. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means B9, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball that precedes (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means B9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened and closed during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

In addition, the structure related to the above means B9 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating, and the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means B11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means B1 to B10 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means B12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means B13. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means B1 to B12 is configured to be able to perform control to cause the movable body to perform the predetermined action to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means B13, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation advantageous to the player occurs, such as when multiple game balls consecutively enter the variable ball entry means at the same time, these multiple game balls Depending on the timing of ball entry, all of the game balls may end up heading for the special ball entry means, or all of the game balls may not go to the special ball entry means and may instead be guided to the ejection section or non-special ball entry means. The configuration made it easy for problems such as storage to occur.

Normally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, even if a new game ball enters the special ball entry means when the right to a special gaming state has been obtained, the special gaming state will not be granted. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls consecutively enter the special ball entry means, two special game states will not be granted, but only one special game state will occur. Therefore, the player may feel negative feelings such as loss, waste, waste, etc.

As a result, there is a concern that even though a favorable situation for the player, such as being granted a special gaming state, has occurred, the player's interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, if all the game balls have been guided to the ejection section etc., since multiple game balls entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game ball is not allowed to enter the special ball entry means. This does not contribute at all to the player's expectation that the game will be advantageous in letting the ball enter the ball, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease.

In this sense, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to dramatically improve the interest when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Our goal is to provide gaming machines that allow you to:

Means C1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route (that can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means C1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is configured to include route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes will flow down to either the first route or the second route. The above-mentioned movable body is provided in order to make it possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. This will result in more effective effects.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in the first state,
When the game ball flows down to the first route due to the route allocating means maintained in the first state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the second state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

Under the configuration according to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are successively entered into the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball that precedes the variable ball entry means is maintained in the first state by the route distribution means. It is necessary for the subsequent second game ball to flow down to the second route by the route allocating means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is possible to ensure a more reliable gaming property in which it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. Can be done.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "Means C2. The route distribution means is
A route distribution member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture;
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first attitude, the force received from the game ball causes the route distribution member to (for example, resist the urging force of the urging means). The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so as to change to the second attitude. ” etc.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. From the moment when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the above means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to suppress the decrease in interest for the players.

Note that the above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" only needs to be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable object arrival time", for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly from the route distribution means (a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly) This is intended to include configurations in which the distance is zero, etc.).

Further, one possible way to lengthen the "movable body arrival time" is to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route", for example.

Moreover, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route." Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

In addition, "from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. The movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means until the game ball reaches the movable body It is preferable that the arrival time is shortened.

If the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time" is longer than the above-mentioned "advantageous end arrival time", two game balls will consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the first game of the preceding one will be played. When the ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player can distribute the game ball after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. Since it is known that the movable object is reached, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation of changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball that precedes it will always be distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent game ball will be distributed to either the first route or the second route. If the configuration is such that the second game ball is sorted to the other route, it will be consecutively entered depending on the relationship between the preset "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable object arrival time". As soon as the two played game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the subsequent result is determined, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which one to allocate, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed.

As a result, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, and can suppress a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
When the route allocating means is maintained in the standard state, the game ball can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means changes to the second state due to the force received from the game ball,
When the game ball flows down to the second route due to the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the first state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

According to the above means C5, the same effects as the above means C4 are achieved. In particular, according to the present means, since there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, it is possible to adopt a relatively simple configuration and alternately move a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the water flows down different routes. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "Means C5. The route distribution means is
A route distribution member configured to be able to change its posture between at least a first posture in which a game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which a game ball can flow down to the second route,
comprising a maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture;
In a state where the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, the game ball can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route due to the route distribution member maintained in the standard posture, the route distribution member changes to the second posture due to the force received from the game ball,
When the game ball flows down to the second route due to the route distribution member maintained in the reference posture, the route distribution member is configured to change to the first posture due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that: ” etc.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. From the time when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means), the second route takes a long time to reach an advantageous state until the movable body enters an advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, further comprising: a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the physical arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the structure is such that the time required for the movable body to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, it will be known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "first said second route" and the "second said second route"; The game ball passing through the "first said second route" or the "second said second route" respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means It may be configured to be detected by means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means C7. The game according to any one of means C1 to C6, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the above means C7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means C8. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means C8, even game balls other than the game balls that entered the timing ball entry means and the game balls that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means C8 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period." The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means C8 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time of the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means C9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means C10. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means C1 to C9 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means C12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means C1 to C11 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means C12, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing each time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, in the past, there was a possibility that the player could grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body and commit fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Furthermore, the effects associated with movable objects tend to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means D1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
Movable body control capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detection means). and means;
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is met) until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by making the period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the above-mentioned operating condition is met) until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state (for example, the opening period) variable, the movable body is activated every time. Since movements are not performed at fixed timings, it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using movable bodies. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will know the timing of the operation of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means D2. an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means D1, characterized in that the operating condition can be established based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

If the trigger ball entry means that triggers the operation of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), a wire or the like can be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection and activate the movable body. This may make it easier for fraudulent acts to occur.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means D2, the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Here, for example, if it is set as "a configuration in which the operating condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means", the software can decide whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state. Since it is not necessary to perform the random selection process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as installing a fraudulent ROM or the like in which the program related to the lottery process has been tampered with.

Means D3. an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least the establishment of the operation condition until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state;
and actuation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of the plurality of actuation patterns stored in the actuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means D2, characterized in that:

According to the means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the present means, there is no need to provide the variable ball entry means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball entry means can be simplified.

Means D4. During the operation start period, a performance means capable of performing at least a preliminary performance (opening performance) that suggests that the movable body will be in the predetermined advantageous state;
performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
The gaming machine according to means D3, further comprising performance control means capable of controlling the performance means based on a performance pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above-mentioned means D4, by performing a preliminary effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know when the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, and has a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. In addition to the behavior of the game ball, the game effect related to the movable body can be watched closely, making it possible to further improve interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation start period from when the actuation condition is satisfied until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is variable, if the operation start period is relatively long, even if the actuation condition is satisfied, First, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or angry that the movable body may not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such problems, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for players.

Means D5. comprising a lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process. .

According to the means D5, the determination as to whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means D6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different times of the fluctuation display;
Variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable body may be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the means D6, it is possible to make variable the variable time from the start of variable display to the stop display on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means D7. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball situation in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them). (Similarly.) Even if an advantageous situation occurs for the player, if all of these multiple game balls head toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is, There is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Note that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation of changing the state of the route distribution means,
Means D7 comprises a plurality of the second routes configured such that the time required for the game ball passing through the specific area to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different. The game machine described.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means variable.

Furthermore, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined trigger) until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game balls. This allows the player to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

In addition, "the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball that passes through each of the "plurality of second routes". may be configured to move toward a single ball opportunity entry means (original ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same opportunity ball entry detection means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. A first route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state; , and a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enters the game ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. When game balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball ahead is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a certain period of time, the game ball may arrive at the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest. There is.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means D9, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

In addition, the "second said second route" only needs to take a shorter time for the game ball to pass than the "first said second route"; This is intended to include configurations in which the ball enters the ball (such as a configuration in which the distance to the timing means for entering the ball is zero).

In addition, one way to increase the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first said second route" is to lengthen the travel distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first said second route". It can be considered as

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed on the "first said second route". Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

Furthermore, by installing a delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball that has flown down to the first route is movable longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". A configuration may be adopted in which the time taken for the movable body to reach the body is longer.

Means D10. The game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means D10, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means D11. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means D11, even game balls other than the game balls that entered the timing ball entry means and the game balls that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period following the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means D11 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time of the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means D13. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means D1 to D12 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means D14. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means D15. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means D1 to D14 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means D15, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which a release opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue E. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines include, for example, a guide route for directing game balls that have entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and a guide route for directing game balls that have deviated from the guide route to the internal area. Some have a release route (discharge route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the past, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball once deviated from the guide route and was guided to the deviated route. It made no contribution to the game and was simply thrown away. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means E1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route out of the internal area;
Ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a specific processing execution means capable of executing a specific processing advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of a game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the means E1, based on the detection of game balls ejected via the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player, such as making it easier to generate a special gaming state, is executed. be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls flowing down towards the special ball entry means via the first route (guidance route), but also the behavior of the game balls ejected via the second route can be used to create new gameplay. This can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the ball detection means.

According to the means E2, it becomes possible to execute specific processing advantageous to the player each time a game ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the interest for the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. comprising lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery processing based on detection by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the lottery process.

According to the means E3, it is no longer necessary to execute specific processing advantageous to the player every time a game ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the specific processing is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific processing is executed. It is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means E4. comprising a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number.

According to the means E4, even when the number of game balls that deviate from the first route (guide route) and flow to the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, a decrease in interest for the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. Counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means;
A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the lottery process.

According to the means E5, there is no need to execute specific processing advantageous to the player every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means exceeds a predetermined number, so that it has the same effect as the means E3. The effect is produced.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; Equipped with a movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
The specific processing execution means is
Any one of the means E1 to E5 is characterized in that the movable body control means is equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. gaming machines.

According to the means E6, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. comprising route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration according to the means E6, if, for example, a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time when the above predetermined condition is about to be met (the two game balls are almost spaced apart from each other) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the balls continue to flow down without leaving a gap (the same applies hereinafter), all of these multiple game balls will be sent to the second route (discharge). If the ball goes towards the special ball entry means, there is a risk that even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means E7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or Since it is possible to direct one game ball to the first route, such as flowing down one of the second routes and the second subsequent game ball flowing down the other route, the above-mentioned movable body The provided effects will be more successful.

As a result, the player will be able to watch with anticipation the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means, thereby further increasing his interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means E8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means E9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The means E6 or E7 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. gaming machines.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means E10. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body will be activated to the next game ball that has passed through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be operable.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means E10, the game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) as the game ball that was involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition (last) also has a higher The player will be given a chance to enter the ball into the special ball entry method with probability.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable entry ball means together with the game balls that were involved in (last) the establishment of the predetermined condition, or even if the game balls that were involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition (last) and the other game balls do not enter the variable entry means, Even if other game balls that entered the ball means do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means will have a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. This will give you a chance to play the ball.

Thereby, even after confirming that the predetermined condition has been met, the player can actively play the game in order to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the above means E10 is defined as ``When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is in the open state. The game machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during the open state period. .

Note that the configuration related to the above means E10 adjusts the time from the time when the predetermined condition is established until the movable body starts operating, the operating period of the movable body after the start of operation, etc. under the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means. By doing so, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10 is configured to be able to execute control to cause the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means E11, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which a release opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means E12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Conventional issue F. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since conventional variable ball entry means have multiple winning holes (specific areas), such as on both the left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the timing of the entry of the game balls, they may interfere with each other, and even one ball may be specially entered. There is a risk that the game ball will not flow down the route desired by the player, such as not heading toward the ball means, and the player's interest will decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means F1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
The game ball is provided so that its state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route. A movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; Equipped with
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A game machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the means F1, by providing a movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body moves in a predetermined manner based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. Since the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the game will be in an advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In particular, this means is configured to include route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes will flow down to either the first route or the second route. The above-mentioned movable body is provided in order to make it possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. This will result in more effective effects.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, with this means, the specific area is provided in only one place through which the game balls can pass one by one, and the ball path that can guide the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided in only one place. Therefore, the game balls can be appropriately guided one by one to the route distribution means. Thereby, the above-mentioned effects will be more reliably achieved.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine according to means F1, characterized in that a game ball that does not pass through the ball path cannot pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball path is configured to be able to pass through a specific area, the game ball that does not pass through the ball path will pass through the ball path and flow down toward the specific area. There is a risk of interfering with On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area unless it passes through the ball path, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above problem and further enhance the effect of the means F1. can.

Means F3. The gaming machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided one by one to the opening/closing member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress problems such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and causing the balls to bite.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls shot with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass therethrough.

According to the means F4, the ball path is provided only at a position (for example, on the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined intensity (for example, right-handed) by the firing means can pass. The effects of the means F1 etc. can be further enhanced.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that the means F1 to F4 are provided with a regulating means for allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while regulating the pass of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in the specific area. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball path in succession, the behavior of the first game ball, etc. that precedes the first game ball and the following game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the second game ball colliding with each other and interfering with each other. As a result, the effects of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means includes one whose state changes from the first state to the second state depending on the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. The game according to any one of means F1 to F5, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means F7. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) are treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means F7 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means to the time when the movable body starts operating. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means F8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means F9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means F1 to F8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means F11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any of the means F1 to F10 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means F11, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (feeling of excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means G1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
special ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a first opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball entry means;
a first flow route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second flow route that allows the game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first downstream route or the second downstream route;
A movable body that is capable of changing its state at least between an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the specific area. and,
the predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body is caused to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means; A movable body control means capable of controlling the movable body,
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be reached is different depending on whether the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and the case where the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. A gaming machine with special features.

In addition, when "a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entering means or the second opportunity ball entering means", for example, "the first opportunity entry means" "When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means," or "based on the ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means." This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through a predetermined lottery result.

According to the means G1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing various opportunity ball entry means (various opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting movement triggers of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that enters the internal area can be detected. Since it is determined based on the behavior whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, the present means is configured such that the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be achieved is different between when the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and when the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. There is. This allows the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route and reach the first opportunity ball entry means, and the time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route to the second The gaming machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for the ball to flow down the downstream route and reach the second opportunity entry means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state is variable between when the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and when the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. It can be done.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, further comprising a delay means for delaying the falling of the game ball in the first falling route or the second falling route.

According to the means G3, even if the lengths of the first downstream route and the second downstream route are relatively short, by providing the above delay means, it takes a long time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position. can be relatively long. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming space. Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

Means G4. comprising a lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means,
The predetermined operating condition is configured to be satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process,
In the specific state, the rate at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained when a game ball is detected by the first opportunity ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second opportunity ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the numbers are different from each other.

According to the means G4, the determination as to whether or not to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, in the present means, the percentage of obtaining the predetermined lottery result is different between when the game ball is detected by the first chance ball entering detection means and when the game ball is detected by the second chance ball entry detection means. Since they are configured differently, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G5. The route distribution means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, characterized in that in the specific state, the rate at which the route distribution means is in the first state and the rate at which it is in the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player will be able to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, so that it is possible to further improve interest. can. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the route distribution means is in the first state and the rate at which the route distribution unit is in the second state can be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
In the specific state, the game ball includes a route allocating means (upstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play multiple balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the predetermined route or , the game ball is flown down either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball is flown down the other route. Since it becomes possible to direct the object to both directions, the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body becomes more effective.

Means G7. The game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means and/or the second opportunity ball entry means) cannot flow down to the special ball entry means (ball cannot enter). A gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means G7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that is acted upon by the movable body are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means G8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means), the next time the game ball enters the ball, The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means G8, a game ball other than the game ball that entered the timing ball entry means and the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down a predetermined route, or one of the first downstream route or the second downstream route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed the specific area next) flows down the other route. Then, the game ball that has flown down to the first falling route or the second falling route enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means) and enters the movable body. is activated, the movable body is not yet activated at the time when the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route passes the movable body, and even if the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route does not enter the special ball entry means. Then, during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that enters the internal area (the next game ball that passed through the specific area) flows down to a predetermined route, and due to the action of the movable body, a special ball enters the internal area. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a chance is given for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

Therefore, the above means G8 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means), the game ball Any of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body is configured to be able to act on the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the ball has passed. It may also be stated as "A gaming machine described in the above."

In addition, the configuration related to the above means G8 is based on the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from when the movable body starts operating after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means G9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means G10. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means G1 to G9 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means G11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means G12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means G12, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional subject H. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing each time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, conventionally, the timing of the movement of the movable body could be grasped by the player, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act could be carried out, for example, by vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Furthermore, the effects associated with movable objects tend to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means H1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
The behavior of the game ball that passes through the specific area is provided so that the state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (that can act on the game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: opening/closing pattern determining means for determining which opening/closing pattern to execute among a plurality of opening/closing patterns when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means H1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body moves in a predetermined manner based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. Since the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the game will be in an advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening/closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means will vary. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body.

In addition, when changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means, etc., for example, there is a method of providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body and changing the selection probability of the pattern to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means, etc. It is also possible to change the operation mode of a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball by performing a predetermined action, and adjust the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means to a desired ball entry rate. The work is extremely difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this respect, according to the present means, it is possible to more easily change the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns is performed, the movable body is configured to be more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed. A gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to the above means H2, for example, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member is opened at a relatively high rate is performed, more game balls can enter the variable ball entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special entry means is increased, and the game increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. Can perform. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
Display means that starts a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggered ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
a holding means capable of holding the fluctuating display on the display means for a predetermined number of times;
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

According to the above means H3, the movable body does not need to perform an action every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, so that the effect of the above means H1 etc. is enhanced, and the monotony of the performance related to the movable body is suppressed. It is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the movement of the body.

In addition, in this means, by providing the holding means, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the movable body operates. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3 is characterized in that it includes an operation pattern determining means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is brought into the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body, the effects of the means H1 and the like can be further enhanced. Although it is extremely difficult to adjust the ball entry rate into the special ball entry means to a desired ball entry rate, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest, as described above. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the means H5, since the opening/closing member opens relatively more often, more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means.

Means H6. According to means H5, at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball by the firing means. gaming machines.

According to the means H6, the effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. The game according to any one of means H1 to H7, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the above means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means H9. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means H9, even for game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state), there is a higher probability that a special The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. It happens.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means H9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed." A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the configuration related to the above means H9 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means H11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means H1 to H10 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means H13. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means H1 to H12 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means H13, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issues I. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

However, in such a pachinko machine, in order to cause the game ball to enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball into the gaming area even after the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. be. In such a case, conventionally, the variable ball entry means has already been released, so even if a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means at this timing, no opening opportunity etc. is obtained and the prize ball is not awarded. It was just that. As a result, there is a risk that players' interest in the game may decline, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means I1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. means and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "a starting entering ball capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the starting ball entering means" ``When a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detecting means'' or ``a predetermined starting lottery is conducted based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detecting means'', This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the initial lottery.

According to the above means I1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly inserted into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined opening game state in which the variable entering ball means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The configuration is such that control can be executed to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a ball enters the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition.

As a result, the movable body performs a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means even during the open game state (during the release period of the variable ball entry means) in which release opportunities etc. cannot be obtained conventionally. A situation may arise that is advantageous to a player who does.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means I2. The movable body control means causes the movable body to perform the predetermined operation when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means and a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state. The gaming machine according to means I1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the predetermined advantageous state into the predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, a variable ball entry device is used for a predetermined period of time from the time when the variable ball entry device is in the open state (or from the time the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry device that is in the open state). This is set as a standby time (remaining ball monitoring period) for waiting for a predetermined detection switch to detect a game ball (remaining ball) that has entered the internal area of the means but has not yet been ejected.

However, conventionally, if a new game ball enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls will be paid out, but a lottery based on the entered ball will not be held. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

On the other hand, according to the means I2, even during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state (during the remaining ball monitoring period), the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action. As a result, the effects of the above means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. The present invention is characterized in that the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means to when the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) starts to open can be changed in a plurality of ways. A gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means until the opening of the variable ball entry means is always constant, the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. At this point, the player can easily grasp that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the opening timing of the variable ball entry means related to the starting ball entry, and at that point, the player cannot release the game ball. There is a risk that some players may temporarily stop playing.

Furthermore, if the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means until the opening of the variable ball entry means is always constant, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means may be controlled by the player. There is a risk that the player will easily be able to grasp the timing of the game, and that actions such as shooting game balls at the same time will be easily performed.

On the other hand, according to the above means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means changes, and the variable ball entry means does not always open at a constant timing, so the game performance related to the variable ball entry means is monotonous. It is possible to suppress the As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as firing a game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means will be performed. Furthermore, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means that starts a variable display based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on a lottery result of a predetermined opening lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different times of fluctuation display related to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
a first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means;
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, characterized in that the game machine is configured to be able to execute the open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened after the first display means displays a stop indication.

According to the above means I4, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the first display means. Utilizing this, it is possible to make variable the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means until opening of the variable ball entering means is started.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 described above can be realized through relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I5. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operating lottery processing based on a game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof); Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activated lottery process.

If the movable body is configured to operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state), At the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the player can easily understand that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of the movement of the movable body related to the starting ball entry. , there is a risk that some players may temporarily stop shooting the game balls at that point.

According to the above means I5, the movable body does not operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after its termination). Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means I6. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, characterized in that (the time it takes for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

Even if the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always constant. In this case, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the starting ball entry means. There is a risk that some players may easily notice this, and at that point some players may temporarily stop shooting game balls.

In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always If the timing is constant, the player may easily grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and may easily perform actions such as firing a game ball in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above means I6, the operation timing of the movable body changes and the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, so that monotony of game performance using the movable body is suppressed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as firing a game ball in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body will be performed. Furthermore, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. from among a plurality of preset times based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state). The gaming machine according to means I6, characterized in that it is equipped with a set time selection means that can select any one of them.

According to the above means I7, the configuration related to the above means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I8. A variable display is started based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process is started. a second display means that performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on;
a second variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different times of variation display related to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second fluctuation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) second fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the fluctuation patterns;
a second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to means I6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the second display means.

According to the means I8, by providing the second display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the above means I8, it is possible to make variable the variable time from the start of the variable display to the stop display on the second display means. Utilizing this, from the time the game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. The time can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized through relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I9. After the end of the predetermined open game state (and/or a predetermined period after the end), the movable body is configured to be able to act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8.

In a game machine configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability under the action (assist) of a movable body, during a predetermined open play state (and/or after the end of the play state) When a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during a predetermined period (at the time of actuation assist lottery), there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decline when there are no game balls in the internal area. There is.

On the other hand, according to the means I9, at the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end), the game ball is placed in the internal area. Even if the game ball does not exist, a game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means opened at a predetermined timing will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

As a result, the player can change the variable even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state). It becomes possible to actively play the game in order to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means I10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means I11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means I1 to I10 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means I11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of the means B1 to B13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means C1 to C12, the configuration of a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D15, the above means E1 to E12 A part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a part or all of the means G1 to G12, a part or all of the means H1 to G12, The configuration of a part or all of any of H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means B1 to B13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means D1 to D15, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means E1 to E12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means H1 to H13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, The structure of a part or all of any of the means H13 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A pinball game machine that includes a game area where game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine having a gaming area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) in which the game ball is guided and extends substantially vertically, and each ball entry means (general winning hole, A pinball game machine is equipped with a variable prize winning device, an operating port, etc., and is configured such that the behavior of game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(c) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with the first embodiment described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) includes a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

FIG. 50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 51 is a perspective view, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, game board 30, etc. FIG. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, back pack unit 203, etc. are opened. However, in FIG. 52, for convenience, nails and various accessories as route changing means arranged on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 52 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 55, etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is now possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. Thereby, when the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed on the performance display device 42, etc., or the content of the performance is changed, as will be described later.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotary operating section as a first operating section that is rotatably assembled to the base. , a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation section, a firing stop switch as a second operation section that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the game area, etc. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "launching device") 60 as a launching means to be described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. In addition, in order to clarify the ownership of the game balls used at the game hall, certain information that can identify the game hall is written on them by engraving, etc., and game balls brought in from other game halls cannot be used. This prevents fraudulent activities, etc. Further, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Additionally, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 52) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device having a plunger as a movable member is employed as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

A ball feeding device 63 is provided above the firing device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 52 and 53 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. ) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower plate communication path 71 and the upper plate communication path 73. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective entrances of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the payout passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart, and the gap between them is replaced by the game ball. is allowed to pass.

In addition, since the entrance of the lower tray communication path 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the balls are not put out. The game balls flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and are delivered to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. The game board 30 in this embodiment is based on a transparent plate, which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties, such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that objects existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but also that at least a portion of light can be transmitted and the presence of the object can be seen. It may also include a so-called semi-transparent state.

With this configuration, the player can view various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the gaming area, and the player , the light emitted from the LED can be seen from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emitting manner in response to various game performances, and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game.

Furthermore, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of a band-shaped metal plate, and guide means for guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. A rail 50 is attached. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 53) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 53) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 54 as a movement regulating means and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 as a return regulating means, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the gaming area.

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. be discharged.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device (big winning opening) 32, an upper starting winning opening 33YA, a lower starting winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and a first The special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, etc. are arranged so as to be fitted into attachment holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to allocate the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball that moves relative to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes its state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 includes a shaft member whose rear end side is directly or indirectly fixed to the game board 30, a central cylindrical portion through which the front end side of the shaft member is inserted, and a shaft member extending radially outward from the central cylindrical portion. It has a plurality of extended contact pieces as actuated parts and a decorative disc part which is circular plate-shaped in front view and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical part, and the game ball comes into contact with the contact pieces. By receiving an external force, it rotates with the front-rear direction as the axial direction. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down through various paths while having their flow direction and rotation direction changed by nails 49 and the like. Then, some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively through various routes, and the windmill 57 divides the falling routes to the left and right. Here, in the first mode in which the game ball passes on the left side of the windmill 57, and when the game ball acts on the contact piece in the first close state, the windmill 57 moves in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first mode of operation. Perform a rotational motion to . On the other hand, when the game ball passes on the right side of the windmill 57 in the second mode and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the second close state, the windmill 57 moves clockwise in the second mode of operation. Performs rotational motion.

Under such a configuration, for example, game balls distributed to the right side by a windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display unit 35 are distributed to the left side by the left windmill 57. Compared to a game ball, it is easier to be guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA by the nail 49 or the like. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 are compared to the game balls distributed to the left side by the right windmill 57. , it becomes easier to be guided to the variable winning device 32.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the left windmill 57 rather than the case where the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes through the left side of the left windmill 57. When passing through the right side of the ball, the proportion of game balls guided to the upper starting prize opening 33YA is higher than when the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the right side of the left windmill 57. When the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game balls pass through the left side of the left windmill 57, the proportion of game balls guided to the general winning slot 31 increases.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the gaming area is widely expanded in the left and right direction, by providing the windmill 57 etc., the gaming ball can be moved to the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the variable winning device 32 etc. It is constructed so that it is easy to guide the person to the destination. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winnings to the top starting prize opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. occur with a moderate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left side area and the right side area of the variable display unit 35, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the left windmill 57 or the right windmill 57 is provided. It is also possible to have a configuration including the following. Furthermore, when the game board 30 is configured based on a transparent plate as in the present embodiment, at least a portion of the windmill 57 such as a decorative disc portion is configured as a transparent portion using a transparent resin material or the like. You may. The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball is a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the windmill 57 and at least a part of the game ball do not overlap, and a first positional relationship where at least a part of the windmill 57 and the game ball are in a non-adjacent state. The positional relationship changes to a second positional relationship, which is a close state in which at least a portion thereof overlaps. Therefore, when the transparent part is provided, in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the transparent part of the windmill 57. It happens. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the windmill 57, a part of the game ball that overlaps with the transparent part of the windmill 57 blocks a part of the light that has passed through the game board 30, and also Light such as external light is irradiated from the front through the part of the game ball.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as detection means for detecting game balls that have won into the various winning holes, corresponding to various winning holes (ball entering means) such as the general winning hole 31. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. In addition, a first starting winning switch 224A is provided in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and a second starting winning switch 224B is provided in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (balls entered) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, one prize will be awarded, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). Here, the upper starting winning hole 33YA may constitute a first starting ball entering means, the lower starting winning hole 33YB may constitute a second starting ball entering means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute a specific ball entering means. . Further, a state in which a game ball enters a predetermined winning hole such as the upper start winning hole 33YA may be considered as an advantageous state. For example, the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA and three prize balls are paid out, and the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the general winning hole 31 and ten prize balls are paid out. It may also be an advantageous state of 2. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a grand prize opening (code omitted) into which game balls can be won, a rectangular flat opening/closing plate (great winning opening opening/closing member) 32a as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the grand prize opening, and the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with a solenoid for the big prize opening (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing portion 32a.

In normal times when a predetermined condition is not met, the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, but when a predetermined condition is met, such as when a jackpot or small win, which will be described later, occurs. In this case, by energizing the grand prize opening solenoid, the opening/closing plate 32a is tilted forward using its lower side as a pivot axis, and the game ball enters the opening state where it can enter the grand prize opening.

The upper starting prize opening 33YA allows game balls to be won at all times. On the other hand, the lower starting prize opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya serving as opening/closing members that rotate and displace in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. , the movable blade 37Ya opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, and a gaming ball entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB. The state can be changed between a closed state and an impossible closed state.

As described above, the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B as detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 (to be described later) The structure is such that variable displays and predetermined effects are performed. Here, if you win in the lottery, you will be given a jackpot status or the like.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) with "Long Open" as one special prize state.

In this embodiment, "long open" means that a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 has been switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the variable winning device 32 has received a specified number of winnings. It refers to one opening/closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "Long Open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), "Short Open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds has passed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the specified time has elapsed as specified in the variable winning device 32. It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls win a prize.

In this embodiment, the game ball is fired from the firing device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the player's operation of the handle 18. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, with just one "short release", even one game ball may not win. For this reason, the opening/closing plate 32a is almost never closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (the number of winnings is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and once the opening/closing plate 32a is opened, will normally be closed based on the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short release" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R definite variable jackpot A" and "4R definite variable jackpot B", this is repeated four times (4 rounds) with "long opening" as one special prize condition.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 8 times (8 rounds), "short open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", this is repeated four times (four rounds) with "long open" as one special prize state.

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 5 times, and then "long opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times. . In other words, five "short releases" are performed in the first round, and "long releases" are performed in each of the second to 16th rounds.

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is provided as a lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the above-mentioned various jackpots are completed, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as a.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting winning hole 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" which is normally set. It refers to a state in which there is an increase in the number of

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 described below is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is executed per time is set to "low support mode". (5) A state in which the winning probability in the open lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB, increasing the number of times jackpot lottery is executed, and making it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the completion of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a variable display of "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. ``High Support Mode'' will be granted during the period. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the completion of "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", "high support mode" is given while "30 times" variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

After the “JUB Jackpot” ends, “Until next time/High support mode” will be given.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

A state in which "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are added becomes a so-called "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/fail lottery. In the small win state, "short opening" is treated as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (5 rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode that are awarded after the small winning state ends are the original modes before the small winning state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small winning state is "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the prize is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33YA, "16R definite strange jackpot A", "16R sure strange jackpot B", "4R sure strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot B" ”, “16R regular jackpot A”, “16R regular jackpot B”, and “4R regular jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33YB. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower starting prize opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R each include two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and by controlling these individual light sources on and off, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment, and also to light up any combination of display segments. The display segment can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, a variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and a variable display is performed on the second special display device 43R when a game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The configuration is such that a variable display is performed at . Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery, etc. is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for a few seconds) )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots (see FIG. 86) are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" is displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the manner in which the special display devices 43L and 43R stop corresponding to each type of win is not limited to the above-mentioned manner. For example, there may be not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type. For example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", one of "91", "92", "93", etc. is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, there are multiple stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and "small win". It is preferable that the plurality of stopping modes have a confusing configuration. For example, any one of "-1.", "-2", "-3.", "-4", etc. is displayed as a stop mode related to "JUB jackpot", and "small jackpot" is displayed. As a plurality of stop modes, any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . . . may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols (here, "1", "2", "3", etc.) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit. One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and these are alternately inserted.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33YB. Correspondingly, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33YA, 33YB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also suspended.

Basically, the fluctuating display that is triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and is digested in the order in which it is won, and is displayed in the lower starting winning hole. The variable display triggered by winning in 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins in the lower starting winning hole 33YB, and is digested in the order in which the winnings are won. However, if both the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper start winning hole 33YA and the variable display triggered by a win in the lower start winning hole 33YB are suspended (the first holding lamp 46a and the second If one or more of the holding lamps 46b are lit, the variable display triggered by a win in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is preferentially digested. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is not performed unless all of the variable displaying triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is digested. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball is won in the lower start winning hole 33YB and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, a winning into the upper starting winning hole 33YA is disabled. The fluctuating display triggered by the winning will be postponed, and the fluctuating display triggered by the winning to the lower starting prize opening 33YB will be performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33YB is referred to as the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. Although details will be described later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate switch 225 opens or closes. An opening lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the accessory 37Y (lower starting prize opening 33YB), and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the player wins in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y remains open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a variation specification indicating which of the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower start winning hole 33YB the variable display performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol changes from "○" to "x" to The display changes at high speed in the order of "○" →... Then, when the fluctuating display stops for several seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time. The display contents of this normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times that the change is held is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 44. There is.

The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 92, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of symbols (numbers) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area. ), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "probable and variable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and an effect display device At step 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and a jackpot state is started. Ru. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as will be described later.

Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state.

Note that even if a ready-to-win state occurs, if a jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", the number of zeros is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, the numbers are stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the gaming state (such as whether or not it is a "high probability mode") that will be awarded after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether it is a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win." In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", instead of a predetermined specific combination of numbers, the display will stop at a random winning combination, just like when you win. You can also do this.

Furthermore, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player will be able to grasp the game status, lottery results, etc. exclusively from the display contents of the performance display device 42 (symbol display, pending display, etc.).

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and when a fluctuation display is performed on the effect display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It emits blue light, and it emits red light when a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33YB is performed.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that the variable display unit 35 is It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members laminated is disposed on the front side of a backlight serving as a light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be viewed through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 53, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33YA.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, an upper performance accessory unit 761 and a lower performance accessory unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213.

Specifically, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is arranged on the back side of the upper side part 47a of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 56), almost the entire part is covered by the upper side part 47a etc. Only a portion is visible to the player.

Further, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is arranged on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the lower side 47b etc. Only the player can see the player.

Here, the configurations of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 will be explained in detail. First, the upper performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 disposed on the upper front surface of the frame cover 213, an upper movable accessory 811 that is swingably provided with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the upper movable accessory unit 761. A swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging an object 811 is provided.

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable accessory 811, and a swing motor 815 that serves as a drive source for driving the support arm 814.

As the support arm 814 is rotated based on the drive of the swing motor 815, most of the upper movable accessory 811 is located behind the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see. It is possible to oscillate between a standby state (see FIG. 56) and an exposed state (see FIG. 58), in which most of the part is located on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 and is easily visible to the player. . The area in front of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 constitutes the effect area (predetermined area) in this embodiment.

The swing motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled. . At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position. Although not shown, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the rotation position of the support arm 814.

Here, the upper movable accessory 811 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The upper movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the tip of a support arm 814, and an upper rotary body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817. The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for presentation, and constitutes a first rotating body as a first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed in the center thereof to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open back side.

On the back side of the base portion 817, an upper rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed. A pinion gear 821b is fixedly attached to the front end of the rotating shaft 821a of the upper rotating body drive motor 821. The driving force of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotary body 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822a is formed in the center of the cover body 822.

The upper rotary body 820 mainly includes a rotary base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 arranged annularly on the front side thereof.

The rotating board 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction, and six extending pieces 827 extending radially outward from the outer circumferential wall of the cylindrical portion 826. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (60° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826.

The cylindrical portion 826 is externally fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotating board 823 is rotatably supported by the base portion 817. Although not shown in the drawings, the cylindrical portion 826 or the spindle portion 818 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the rotary board 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (spindle portion 818). ing.

Each extending piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed on the back surface near the tip of each extending piece 827 to protrude rearward.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front and back.

Further, a pinion gear 832 is fitted onto each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a of a central gear member 831.

Furthermore, an annular presser plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotating board 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the holding plate 835 has a slightly larger diameter than the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831, through which the small diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted, and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear portion 831a.

As a result, the press plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from the rear, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while passing through the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is held rotatably around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823.

A pinion gear 821b of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is meshed with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831. Thereby, the rotation of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831.

That is, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. transmit the power of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 to the upper rotary body 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotary base plate 823. The main power transmission mechanism is configured to drive the vehicle in this manner.

Further, a second drive gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823. As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with a second transmission gear 842. The second transmission gear 842 is connected to an oil damper 843. A support member 844 is fitted into the oil damper 843 from the rear, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817.

As a result, the rotating board 823 is braked so as not to rotate with low torque below a predetermined level. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotary body 820 and regulates the operation of the upper rotary body 820.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and directly transmits power between the upper rotating body drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without going through the rotating board 823. is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 101 and the like, the upper rotating body 820 is formed with the motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one flower petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a transparent resin material having light-transmitting properties. However, fine irregularities (not shown) are formed on the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825 (excluding a magnifying lens portion 828 described later). As a result, the general part of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear, and the whole becomes in a state where the surface emits light uniformly. The configuration makes it difficult to identify the display target (object) displayed on the display section 42a through the general portion of the movable piece 825.

On the other hand, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed in one of the six movable pieces 825 . Hereinafter, when distinguishing the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 from other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as "specific movable piece 825A." The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens section 828 constitute a light-transmitting section in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can enlarge and display an object located at the rear for the player to see. For example, the player can magnify and visually recognize display targets such as letters and characters displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828.

A rack portion 838 extending linearly is integrally formed on the back surface of the movable piece 825. The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extending piece 827 of the rotating board 823. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 (the direction in which the extending piece 827 extends). Although not shown in the drawings, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotating board 823.

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 is engaged with the pinion gear 832 on the back side of the extending piece 827. As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extending piece 827, that is, in the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823, by transmitting the power of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 via the main power transmission mechanism. It becomes possible to slide along the line.

With this configuration, when the upper rotary body 820 is in a normal standby state, the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 are in a reduced diameter state, in which each movable piece 825 is slid to the innermost side in the radial direction. (See Figures 101 and 102).

In addition, in the diameter-reduced state of the upper rotary body 820, the base end portions of the six movable pieces 825 are in a state of approximately contacting the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823, and each movable piece 825 Both side edges on the proximal side of the movable pieces 825 are in a state in which they are substantially in contact with the proximal side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825, respectively.

On the other hand, when a predetermined performance is executed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously sliding the movable pieces 825 radially outward in the six radially arranged extension pieces 827. (See Figures 103 and 104).

Further, a motor control board (motor driver) 845 is attached to the back side of the base portion 817 to control the upper rotating body drive motor 821 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

The upper rotating body drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via a motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes depending on the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the upper rotating body 820 from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 for detecting the rotational position of the upper rotary body 820 (rotary substrate 823) is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the back side of the rotating board 823 (second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). Then, when the light shielding piece 847 is detected by the position detection sensor 846, it is determined that the upper rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the reference position is the position where the specific movable piece 825A is placed on the right side in the horizontal direction when the upper rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Further, although not shown, an upper accessory control board is provided on the base portion 817 to monitor and control the position detection sensor 846 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Under such a configuration, if it is assumed that the upper rotating body drive motor 821 rotates once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal), the angle change based on the 1-pulse excitation signal (angle change per step) is 1. °. That is, in this embodiment, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses) at the shortest for the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate once.

Further, if it is assumed that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the upper rotary body drive motor Under the configuration in which the upper rotating body 821 rotates once with an excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotating body 820 rotates once in 2880 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses x 4) at the shortest.

However, the amount of angular change based on the one-pulse excitation signal, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b, etc. are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 and the like, when the upper rotary body 820 stops rotating, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six locations in the rotational direction of the upper rotary body 820 (clockwise in this embodiment). Predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, a first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, a second stop position EA2 located on the lower right side, and a third stop position EA2 located on the lower left side) The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a stop position EA3, a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally on the upper left side, or a sixth stop position EA6 located on the diagonally upper right side. ing.

Here, the operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 101, 102, etc., in normal times when no accessory performance is performed, the six movable pieces 825 are each located at the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotating body 820. In other words, the upper rotary body 820 is in the most contracted state.

In this state, when the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first begins to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base plate 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base plate 823 remains stopped and does not move.

On the other hand, as the central gear member 831 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate, respectively. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the upper rotating body 820 is slid radially outward in the radial direction. In other words, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radially outer sliding limit position of the upper rotary body 820 and the upper rotary body 820 is in the most expanded state, the rotary board Rotational power will be transmitted to 823. Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotating board 823 starts rotating clockwise in front view.

Thereafter, when the upper rotating body drive motor 821 stops, the upper rotating body 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 each stop at one of the above-mentioned stopping positions EA1 to EA6.

Furthermore, when returning to normal operation after the end of the performance, the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is first rotated in the reverse direction, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view via the pinion gear 821b. let

Even in such a case, when the central gear member 831 initially starts rotating, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating board 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating board 823 is stopped. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 moves.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the upper rotary body 820 is slid radially inward, and the upper rotary body 820 is reduced in diameter.

Thereafter, when the six movable pieces 825 have each slid to the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotary body 820, the upper rotary body drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the upper rotating body 820 returns to its normal reduced diameter state.

Next, the lower performance accessory unit 762 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47.

The lower performance accessory unit 762 includes a unit base portion 850 arranged to cover the front lower part of the frame cover 213, and a lower movable accessory 851 provided on the back side of the unit base portion 850 so as to be movable up and down. , and a vertical drive mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851.

The lower movable accessory 851 includes a slide base part 853 that is displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of left and right pillar parts 854A and 854B that project upward from the slide base part 853, and the pillar parts. Driving motors 855A and 855B for the lower rotary body provided at the upper ends of 854A and 854B, respectively (see FIG. 107); It includes lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A, 857B (see FIG. 107) provided on the back side of the drive motors 855A, 855B. The lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating bodies for presentation, and constitute a second rotating body as a second rotating means.

As shown in FIG. 106, the left lower rotary body 856A (hereinafter referred to as "lower left rotary body 856A") is provided with a first information writing portion 856Aa having a circular shape when viewed from the front at one end in the longitudinal direction. A second information writing section 856Ab having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided on the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab constitute affected sections in this embodiment.

Both information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab are made of a translucent material and can transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the production display device 42 located at the rear at a predetermined transmittance. It is composed of

In the first information writing section 856Aa of the present embodiment, "SMALL" is written in clear letters against a background component that has a relatively high light transmittance and is brightly colored and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "SMALL"). (This description is sometimes referred to as "Strong/SMALL.") The second information writing section 856Ab has "SMALL" written in dull letters against a dark semi-transparent background component with relatively low light transmittance. (Hereinafter, such description may be referred to as "weak/SMALL".)

On the other hand, the general part of the lower left rotary body 856A, excluding both information writing parts 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a non-translucent material, and is light-shielded so as not to transmit the light emitted from the display part 42a of the effect display device 42. It has become a department.

Similarly to the lower left rotary body 856A, the right lower rotary body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower right rotary body 856B") has a circular shape in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. A first information writing section 856Ba is provided, and a second information writing section 856Bb having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided at the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing sections 856Ba and 856Bb constitute affected sections in this embodiment.

Similar to both information writing parts 856Aa and 856Ab related to the lower left rotating body 856A, both information writing parts 856Ba and 856Bb related to the lower right rotating body 856B are made of a translucent material, and are located at the rear. It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from a display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the display device 42 at a predetermined transmittance.

In the first information writing section 856Ba of the present embodiment, "BIG" is written in clear letters against a background component that has a relatively high light transmittance and is brightly colored and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "BIG"). (This description is sometimes referred to as "Strong/BIG.") The second information writing section 856Bb has "BIG" written in dull letters against a dark semi-transparent background component with relatively low light transmittance. (hereinafter, such description may be referred to as "weak/BIG").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower right rotating body 856B, excluding both information writing parts 856Ba and 856Bb, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and does not transmit the light emitted from the display part 42a of the effect display device 42. It is a light shielding part.

Note that the drive motors 855A and 855B for the lower rotary bodies are stepping motors whose rotations are controlled by drive pulse signals applied respectively, and by adjusting the drive pulse signals, the amount of rotation of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B is controlled. can. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are attached to the lower surfaces of the lower rotary body drive motors 855A and 855B. . In this embodiment, known photosensors in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other are used as the position detection sensors 858A and 858B.

Correspondingly, light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are formed to protrude from the back sides (near the side edges) of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Then, when the light shielding pieces 859A, 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A, 858B, it is recognized that the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the longitudinal direction of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is along the vertical direction, and the first information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ba side are higher than the second information writing portions 856Ab, 856Bb side. The position where , becomes the reference position.

Now, the vertical drive mechanism 852 includes a vertical drive motor 860 disposed on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge of the slide base portion 853. A pinion gear 860a fixedly attached to the rotating shaft of the vertical drive motor 860 is engaged with a rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853.

Although not shown in the drawings, the unit base portion 850 is formed with a guide groove extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base portion 853 is formed with a protrusion that is assembled into the guide groove. This restricts displacement in the left-right direction when the slide base portion 853 moves up and down. That is, the guide groove portion and the protrusion portion constitute a guide means for guiding the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B).

With this configuration, by rotating the vertical drive motor 860, the lower movable accessory 851 can be slid in the vertical direction.

Normally, the lower movable accessory 851 is in a standby state where most of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are located at the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see (see FIG. 56). There is. Then, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates forward, and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 is moved so that the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are connected to the production display device 42. It is located on the front side of the display section 42a and is in an exposed state where it is easily visible to the player (see FIG. 58).

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, and the slide base portion 853 slides downward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 returns to the normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the vertical movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B) is controlled. You can control the amount. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the lower movable accessory 851 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 for detecting the vertical position of the lower movable accessory 851 is attached to the unit base portion 850. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 863, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed opposite to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 864 is formed protruding from the lower end of the rack section 861 on the slide base section 853. When the light shielding piece 864 is detected by the position detection sensor 863, it is determined that the lower movable accessory 851 (slide base portion 853) is at the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable accessory 851 is in the above-mentioned standby state is the reference position (standby position).

Here, although not shown in the drawings, it may be configured to include a movement regulating means such as a stopper capable of regulating the movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) by a predetermined amount or more.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 includes a lower accessory control board that performs drive control of the vertical drive motor 860, monitoring control of the position detection sensor 863, etc. in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262. is installed.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, the positional relationship between the upper rotary body 820 and the lower left rotary body 856A or the lower right rotary body 856B is adjusted while the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are respectively rotating or stopped. However, a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap, and at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body It is configured to change to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion of the rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlaps. As will be described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are in a second positional relationship (close state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is configured so that the ratio of

Specifically, when the lower left rotating body 856A stops rotating, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) respectively indicate the rotation direction of the lower left rotating body 856A (this implementation (clockwise direction in this embodiment) predetermined stop positions EB1 to EB4 set at four locations (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, a first stop position EB1 located above the lower left rotating body 856A, a first stop position EB1 located on the right side) The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a second stop position EB2 located on the lower side, a third stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or a fourth stop position EB4 located on the left side.

Then, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop. When it stops at position EA4, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (stopped at the first stop position EB1) is LOW/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed for the player to see (see FIGS. 110 and 111).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A corresponds to the first and second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) corresponds to the first mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operation mode in this embodiment.

In addition, when the rotation of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) are respectively set in the rotational direction of the lower right rotating body 856B (this implementation In the example shown in FIG. 106, there are four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (counterclockwise direction) (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 is located above the lower right rotating body 856B, the left side The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a second stop position EC2 located on the lower side, a third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or a fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side.

Then, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop. When stopped at position EA1, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (strong/BIG) stopped at the first stop position EC1 is Weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed for the player to see (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower right rotating body 856B corresponds to the second second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operation mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to various table configurations, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the upper rotating body When the specific movable piece 825A of 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1 via the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. Or, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) is at the first stop position EC1 than when the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) is enlarged. and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, the first movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EC1 through the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. When the information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) is enlarged, a predetermined advantage advantageous to the player, such as continuation of the high support mode, is displayed as described later. The configuration is such that the ratio of states is high. Furthermore, a second advantageous state (high support mode continues) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode continued "+10 times") that is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the percentage of "continued until next time" increases.

Next, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, etc. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 55 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 53) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a housing box (not shown) in which an opening is formed to expose the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible. Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general prize opening 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the starting prize openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different routes such as the above-mentioned various winning openings and out openings 36. . The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winnings to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225.)
Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a prize winning error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of pitches is provided.

However, in this embodiment, a terminal for outputting information regarding a "small win" is not provided, and the configuration is such that no information on the occurrence of a "small win" is output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently, so occurrence information is not always output every time a "small win" occurs. , this may lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, such as during a "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information on the occurrence of a "small hit" is output.

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is performed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have finished, that is, after the situation is no longer distinguishable from the case of a "small win", for example, as described below. It is preferable to perform the output of the opening command (jackpot notification effect) with the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" confirmed. In a situation where it is still not possible to distinguish between a "small win" and a "JUB jackpot" occurrence information, if only the "JUB jackpot" occurrence information is output first, the information display equipment installed in the hall's island equipment corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, etc. There is a risk that the player will know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred by looking at the "JUB jackpot" and the presentation effect of the "JUB jackpot" will be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 54) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages through which game balls flow down sideways, for example, and which slopes gently toward the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected to the case rail 357 that allows the water to flow downward vertically. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 as a rear guide means into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. The game ball is a rotating body that flows down the game area. The game ball rotates and flows down while coming into contact with nails 49, windmills 57, etc. in the game area and being influenced by it. The game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked in the front and back. It is removably attached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and is unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked with respect to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 54). reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, various conductive members made of conductive metal materials, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail components 51 and 52, and the left and right frame components 11c and 11d, are used. First, various conductive members made of conductive resin materials, such as the tank 355, tank rail 356, and case rail 357, are electrically connected to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown). Incidentally, game balls are generally made of a metal material, the surface of which is polished or plated, and has a luster that reflects light and is electrically conductive. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 54) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L, 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as a display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262 constitutes a light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning unit switches 224A, 224B, and a through gate switch 225. Various electrical components such as various boards are connected to it. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a performance button 125, performance accessory units 761, 762, various illumination parts, and lamps 102, 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. The effect display device 42 controlled by the player performs a display that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. Thereby, the player can change the movement amount and operation mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 is used for jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type determination counter CB2 is used to determine the jackpot type. It is used to set the initial values of the reach selection counter CB3 and the jackpot random number counter CB1, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state when the effect display device 42 is removed and varied, and to determine the type of reach to be generated. The initial value random number counter CINI and the fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42), determining the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) in the effect display device 42, etc. By using the type counters CS1, CS2 and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 used for the lottery of the regular symbol display device 41 (the opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB). There is.

The counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area where the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area where the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored. It is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are set according to the winning history of game balls to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times, respectively, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening value is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA or the lower starting winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lottery games.

There are two types of random number values that result in a jackpot: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." In this embodiment, in the "low probability mode," the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set as "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." 2, the value is "7, 307", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random number values that will be a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/300 to win the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the probability is 1/30 to win the lottery.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

Further, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is also used when determining a "small win". The number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 50, and the values are "101-125, 401-425". In other words, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/12 (a small winning state occurs).

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33YA or when it wins into the lower start winning hole 33YB. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", it is decided to award "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "3", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "Mode", and if it is "4", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "5", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "50 It has been decided that ``16R Probable Variable Jackpot B'' with ``Numbers and High Support Mode'' will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", it is determined that "4R probability variable jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "9", if it is "9", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "10", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "High Support Mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is awarded. If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "18", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "19", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there is a 10% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 20% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot B", and a 5 % probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", 20% probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", 5% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot A", and 20% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot B". , there is a 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33YB, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Furthermore, the reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter CB3 determines the "out-of-front reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops after the reach occurs with respect to the decorative symbol, and the final stop after the reach occurs in the same way. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach judgment table stores values from 0 to 238, CB3 = 0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, CB3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and CB3 = 22 to 238 is a complete reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter CB3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 198), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240). It becomes. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as a "second variation type counter." This is also indicated in FIG. 60.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table (see FIG. 90) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative symbols. Super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. . Premium reach is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, characters with a different pattern from super reach are displayed. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of expectation in the player.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter CB1, reach selection counter CB3, and fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The random number counter CB4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 that results in a winning is acquired, after a fluctuating display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by an input.For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 63, first at step SB301, a process of reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 are read, and the states of the switches are determined. and save the detection information.

In step SB302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SB303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the reach selection counter CB3, and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CB1, CB2, CB3, and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step SB304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, and in step SB305, a through gate passing process is executed as the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step SB304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach selection counter CB3. A reach random number storage area is provided to store the value of .

First, in step SB501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B whether the game ball has won in the lower starting winning hole 33YB. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB502, the value of the lower reservation counter Nb that counts the number of reservations in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB502, the process moves to step SB509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB503, where the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 are set among the vacant reservation areas in the second special fluctuation reservation area. Store in the first area. After step SB504, the process moves to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, when it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type determination table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

In addition, if you win "16R definite strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. For a predetermined period of time (20 variable displays in this embodiment), for example, a production lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a non-announcement production that does not notify that the assigned "high support mode" is "until next time/high support mode". The lottery is held with a probability of about 1/100. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB507, if it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Further, in step SB508, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, as hold information, for example, information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the winning of the variable display. It will be done.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step SB5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. Although the process of step SB5101 is shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 65 for convenience, in reality, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7" and if the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307" or not, and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step SB5101, a negative determination is made in step SB5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process proceeds to step SB5105. In step SB5102, the function of the main controller 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first gaming value (first special gaming state) enables the first gaming value imparting means (first special gaming state generation) in this embodiment. means) are constructed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5101, it is determined in step SB5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of a lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5103, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, in step SB5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used for the second validity determination. Among the values corresponding to jackpots stored in the table, it is determined whether it is any one of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding the above "7" and "307". In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 and each value corresponding to a jackpot match, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and the process is then terminated.

The determination processing in step SB5101 and step SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5103 or step SB5104, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process moves to step SB5105.

Further, in step SB5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5105, that is, if it is determined that a small winning state will occur, the small winning winning flag is turned on in step SB5106, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5105, the process is immediately terminated.

The determination process in step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Further, in step SB5106, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a small winning state corresponding to the second gaming value (second special gaming state) enables the second gaming value giving means (second special gaming state) in this embodiment. (gaming state generating means) is configured.

Next, the reach determination process in step SB507 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether a winning flag (big hit winning flag or small winning winning flag) was set in the jackpot determining process performed immediately before. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, when a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, if a winning state does not occur, then in step SB5302, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area with reference to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5303, a front-back off-reach flag indicating the occurrence of a front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5304, the reach determination table is taken into account and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "reach other than front and back". It is determined whether the value matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "." If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5304, the flag other than front and back out is turned on in step SB5305, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB5304, that is, if the result is "completely missed", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, after the process in step SB508, or if a negative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting prize opening 33YA or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SB509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, in step SB510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning hole 33YA is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB510, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB510, the process proceeds to step SB511, where the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SB512, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. After step SB512, the process moves to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step SB513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SB505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning in the upper starting winning opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step SB514, when it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the above-mentioned first jackpot type judgment table. If the value is either “0, 1”, turn on the “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag”, and if the value is one of “2 to 5” corresponding to “16R Probable Variable Jackpot B” turns on the "16R definite variable jackpot B flag", and if the value is "6" corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot A", turns on the "4R definite variable jackpot A flag", corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot B" If the value is "7 to 10", turn on the "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B flag", and if the value is "11" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot A", turn on the "16R normal jackpot". A flag" is turned on, and if the value is one of "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on the "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B". If the value is one of "16 to 19", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" here, that is, if "High Support Mode Until Next Time" is granted after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-announcement will be made as in step SB506. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to perform the performance. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB515, when it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process in step SB515 is similar to the reach determination process in step SB507, except that the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the ball hitting the upper starting prize opening 33YA. For convenience, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SB516, a holding control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step SB516 is the same as the setting process of the hold control command in step SB508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SB305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67.

In step SB601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step SB601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step SB602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SB603, where the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step SB604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended. Therefore, the process of step SB604 constitutes a part of the third lottery.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed down (ON), and if it is pressed down, the process moves to step SB112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step SB104 whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step SB112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB105, and in subsequent step SB106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step SB112.

In the process of step SB112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SB113, etc.). That is, in step SB113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SB114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SB103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SB107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SB108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SB109, a game state check process is executed to check the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step SB110, a return command is sent to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step SB111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process in step SB109 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a gaming state check process, and FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter Kj, and a gaming state determination value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SB807) and the winning end setting process (step SB1216), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 68, in step SB1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power-off, which is backed up and stored in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj are each read from the RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set. "A3(H)" is set.

The gaming state specific counter Kj is state determination information for counting the number of executions of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot and specifying the switching timing of the gaming state.When the jackpot ends, a predetermined initial value is set and the fluctuating display is subtracted by 1 each time it is performed. For example, as will be described later, if "50" is set as the initial value of the gaming state specific counter Kj, and then the value of the counter Kj becomes "31", the fluctuation display at that point will be as follows: It can be specified that this is the 20th fluctuation display.

In this embodiment, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "16R Normal Jackpot B" or "4R Normal Jackpot B", in other words, after the jackpot ends, "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode" is provided, "50" is set as the initial value.

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", or "JUB Jackpot", that is, if you are granted "Until next time/High support mode" after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be "0". " is set. However, when the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and the non-notification performance is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, in step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SB1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SB1903, the addition value calculated in step SB1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07 (H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined operation. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step SB1904, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1905, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4" or not. In other words, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, the process moves to step SB1909. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1905, the process moves to step SB1906.

In step SB1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1907, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1906 or step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1908.

In step SB1908, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, and in step SB1909, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1910.

In step SB1910, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1911.

In step SB1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1912.

In step SB1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1916, stores the value of the gaming state determination value Xj ("1", "4", "2" or "5") in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and Finish the process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB1912, that is, if the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1", the process moves to step SB1913, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SB1908, and in step SB1914, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" where a non-notification effect is performed, the process moves to step SB1915, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set to "5". Change to Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends. As a result, even if you are in the "until next time/high support mode" state, the lottery mode will be "high probability mode" and the winning support mode will be "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "High Support Mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side device. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device. Some more detailed examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have won in various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are determined. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the gaming state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, the turn-off signal is output. A signal is output.

Further, when displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner by the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 which has input the variation pattern command, symbol command, etc., determines the variation mode of the production display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the production display device 42 (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.). An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (display).

In step SB202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step SB203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SB204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step SB205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R and the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R are set, and jackpot determination and decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are set. Setting of the fluctuation pattern is performed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SB206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a jackpot or a small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SB207, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step SB208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37Y, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SB209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SB210, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process moves to step SB201, and the processes from step SB201 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, in step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SB212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SB202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SB201 to SB209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SB213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SB213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SB214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step SB215. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step SB216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SB217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SB218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

Note that the process in step SB209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SB213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first display control process in step SB205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, various winning medium flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag), which will be described in detail later, are referred to to determine whether or not it is currently a winning state (in a jackpot state or a small winning state). Determine. Note that the winning state (big winning state and small winning state) includes the middle of the winning state and a predetermined time after the winning state ends. The predetermined time after the winning state ends is the time from when the winning state ends until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts, and generally during this time period, the effect display device At 42, a display indicating the end of the win state and various game states and various modes to be provided after the win is made. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a win on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 until the variable prize winning device 32 is released (generally, this time period is A display indicating the start of a winning state is displayed on the effect display device 42) is also included in the winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB801, that is, if the winning state is in progress, this process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB801, a first display is displayed in step SB802, which will be described in detail later. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is undergoing a variable display by looking at the setting status of the medium flag. Specifically, if the first displaying flag is set (in the on state), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the first displaying flag is cleared (in the off state), the fluctuation display is considered to be in progress. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SB920, step SB807). When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step SB814), it is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the fluctuating display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SB803, where the fluctuating display (second fluctuating It is determined whether the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions (display) is greater than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if at least one second variable display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower holding counter Nb in step SB804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored as a result of the determination process in step SB803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In the following step SB805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SB805, in step SB806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step SB807.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if no second variable display is stored in storage, in step SB808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SB808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step SB809. In the following step SB810, processing for shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SB810, in step SB811, the process of turning on and off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process moves to step SB807. In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step SB807, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

First, in step SB900, a game status check process is executed. It should be noted that the gaming status check process is similar to the gaming status checking process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step SB901, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is on.

If it is determined that the win corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step SB902.

In step SB902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SB912.

In step SB903, it is determined whether any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variation jackpot A flag", "16R probability variation jackpot B flag", "4R probability variation jackpot A flag", "4R probability variation jackpot B flag") is on. By determining whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot", it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB903, that is, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", a variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot" in step SB904, and is set in the variation pattern command. . Next, in step SB905, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB903, the process moves to step SB906, and the various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", By determining whether any of the "Jackpot B Flag") is on, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the "Normal Jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step SB906, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" in step SB907, and is set in the fluctuation pattern command. do. Subsequently, in step SB908, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SB920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42, it is impossible to determine the gaming state such as the lottery mode given after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", the "odd number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and so on, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol and the jackpot type. are not clearly associated with each other, and in this embodiment, the above various tables are used to determine the predetermined fluctuations depending on the type of various jackpots, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed with "odd symbols". The tables are simply divided so that the appearance rates of patterns and designs are different. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern or a stop symbol is selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the type of jackpot such as "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB906, the process moves to step SB909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SB909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step SB910.

In step SB910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step SB911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6", which will be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SB920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step SB912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step SB913, a fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into account the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the fluctuation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Continuously, in step SB914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front-back out-of-place symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SB915 whether or not the flag other than front/rear deviation is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step SB916 with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front/back off"; Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flags other than those that are out of order. Subsequently, in step SB917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4", which will be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and back off is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is a "completely off", then in step SB918, an outlier variation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the variation pattern table corresponding to "completely off", and the variation pattern command is Set to . Subsequently, in step SB919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to a completely missed symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable jackpot/variable pattern table"), a variable pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small win" are used. , a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off" (hereinafter referred to as "reach when completely off"). A plurality of variable pattern tables (referred to as variable pattern tables) are provided depending on the gaming status (values of gaming status determination value Xj "0" to "7").

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(a), at "address 100" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0", which corresponds to the "normal state". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step SB904, step SB907, step SB910, step SB913, step SB916, and step SB918, first, based on the gaming state determination value Xj specified in the gaming state check process (step SB900), Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see FIG. 90). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variable pattern command in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set as is. Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are made up of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are made up of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table related to the normal state (Xj=0) [see Figure 89(a)], in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits are set to "0" which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, and the following 4 bits are set to "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot". Then, the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte are set with values that specify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation modes (effect patterns) of decorative symbols in a table, and when a variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored in the sub-control device 262. The pattern (performance pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "BZ1," "BZ2," "BZ3," "BZ4," "BZ5," and "BZ6," and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ2" indicating an even jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “BZ3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "BZ5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "BZ6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command selects the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Further, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in an external output process (step SB201) which will be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on these commands, and performs display control to display the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variable display). An instruction is issued to the device 45.

Now, in step SB920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the first display timer, when a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of normal processing, the special display device Variable display starts at 43L and 43R. After step SB920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 70, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SB812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SB813, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SB813.

When a negative determination is made in step SB813, in step SB817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB813, the first display flag is canceled (turned off) in step SB814, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step SB815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the above-mentioned stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

Subsequently, in step SB816, a variation end setting process is performed, and then this process is ended. Here, the variation end setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 71.

First, in step SB1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if it corresponds to a big win or a small win, the process moves to step SB1002, and win settings are made. Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, open number counter, winning counter Vx, etc. After step SB1002 is completed, the variation end time setting process is ended.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value (turned on).

The small hit medium flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a small win is in progress. Here, like the jackpot medium flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of a small win is set as the flag value. (turned on).

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the open time of the variable winning device 32 (time when the special prize state occurs), the interval between each special prize state, etc., and is defined from the start or end of opening of the opening/closing plate 32a. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not time has elapsed. In the win setting process of step SB1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long open" like "16R guaranteed variable jackpot A", "7500" is set in the first variable timer, and like "JUB jackpot" the first time is the above-mentioned "short open". In this case, "100" is set to the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91, the opening/closing pattern control table includes the number of times the special prize state occurs in each winning state (number of rounds), the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), and the time between each special prize state. The interval time etc. are set in advance.

The open number counter is used to determine the number of times the special prize state occurs during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is the status determination information. In the win setting process of step SB1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" is set. "20" indicating 20 times is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In addition, in the win setting process of step SB1002, the specified number K1 is the maximum expected number of prizes to be won to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening/closing plate 32a, with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. Configure settings. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening/closing member related to one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, if it is a "long open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "10", and if it is a "short open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "3".

In the win setting process at step SB1002, an opening command that announces the start of a big win or a small win is also set. However, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the opening command is set after five "short openings" (such as special prize state start processing in step SB1217, which will be described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the jackpot notification performance etc. will be performed after the five "short openings" are completed, and up to this point, it cannot be distinguished from the case of a small win.

Now, in step SB1001, if it is determined that it does not correspond to a jackpot or a small win, that is, the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag are off, the process moves to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the fluctuation is displayed), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the values corresponding to various jackpots are set as the counter value. Ru.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SB1004, the value of the support number counter is subtracted by 1. . In step SB1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is also performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1005.

In step SB1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", processing is performed to switch the value of the support mode flag to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SB1006, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process of step SB206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step SB1202.

In the following step SB1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process advances to step SB1204, and it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. It is determined whether there is an opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") remaining for each opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening").

If a negative determination is made in step SB1204, the process proceeds to step SB1205, where it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is greater than or equal to the specified number K1, that is, the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of pitches has reached the maximum expected number of prizes (specified number of "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step SB1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB1204 or step SB1205, the process proceeds to step SB1206, where a first variable timer setting process is performed.

Here, the first variable timer indicates whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of a jackpot or small win, or whether the next time has passed since the end of a predetermined special prize state). In order to determine whether the interval before the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc., a predetermined value (for example, a value "750" corresponding to "3 seconds") or "250" corresponding to "1 second") is set.

After that, the process proceeds to step SB1207, where it is determined whether the counter value of the open number counter is "0", that is, whether the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached the specified number of times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1207, an open end setting process is performed in step SB1210, and this process ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long release” or “short release”) has not reached the specified number of times, special prize sending processing is performed in step SB1211, and this processing is continued. finish.

In the special prize sending process of step SB1211, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB1203, that is, within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process advances to step SB1212. , it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1212, that is, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the special prize state and it is time to move to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the normal game), , the process moves to step SB1215. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1212, the process is directly terminated.

In step SB1215, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state or small win state, taking into consideration the winning end flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1215, a winning end setting process is performed in step SB1216, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1215, special prize state start processing is performed in step SB1217, and then this processing is ended.

In the win end setting process of step SB1216, the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is turned off, and the lottery mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching process, the support number counter setting process, and the game status notification command setting process , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot or small win, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small winning winning flag is on, the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value will be "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", and "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "until next time/high support mode". "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. Set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When the "until next time/high support mode" is provided, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that is virtually impossible to reach (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The gaming state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first a game status check process is performed. Since the game status check process is the same as the game status check process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

Incidentally, the jackpot winning flag, the small winning winning flag, and various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the above lottery mode flag switching process are completed. In addition, when the winning setting (step SB1002) is performed in the fluctuation end setting process in FIG. A configuration may also be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is interrupted.

In the special prize state start process of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") related to the next special prize state is set to the first variable with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the specified number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing plate 32a is outputted to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening becomes open. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control process in step SB207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.

In FIG. 74, in step SB2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable by checking the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display. Determine. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step SB2101, the process proceeds to step SB2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step SB2103. In step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SB2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SB2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so "500" is set to the second display timer. . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, "100" is set to the second display timer.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step SB2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SB2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SB2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step SB2108, and in step SB2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process advances to step SB2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is different between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB2107, a switching display setting is performed in step SB2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step SB208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag indicating whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

The process then proceeds to step SB2203, where it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203, the process moves to step SB2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step SB2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball into the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 76, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step SB3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SB3002, in order to memorize that the command was sent from the main control device 261. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SB3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SB3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SB3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SB3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB3107, and in the following step SB3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power-off occurrence information is not set in step SB3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization process from step SB3115. Transition.

In step SB3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power outage occurrence information is set in step SB3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, process). That is, in step SB3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step SB3110, the power cut-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step SB3111, the payout permission flag that allows the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step SB3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SB3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SB3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SB3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SB3124. Thereafter, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SB3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SB3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that the process in step SB3122 checks the power-off occurrence information after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SB3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), first, it is determined in step SB3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 76).

If it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from main controller 261. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step SB3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing in steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is determined in steps SB3304 to SB3306. In step SB3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SB3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SB3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SB3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SB3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SB3309. Thereafter, in step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step SB3307, this command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of RAM 513 (step SB3308) and set the initial value of RAM 513 (step SB3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SB3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step SB3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step SB3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), or a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 78. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step SB3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step SB3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SB3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SB3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state. Further, in step SB3206, a tank ball absent state (ball out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step SB3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SB3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SB3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step SB3210.

In step SB3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step SB3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 80. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first, in step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SB3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. In subsequent step SB4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SB4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step SB4110 In step SB4111, it is determined whether or not it is a gaming state notification command, and in step SB4112, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol command.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4105, and the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4106. Set the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, so the subsystem that does not have a backup function In step SB4107, the control device 262 reads the value of the gaming state determination value Xj (any one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, various information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type) included in the hold control command is processed. information, information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the variable display) is stored in the sub-variation holding area, and this processing ends.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and one sub-execution area. Each of the two sub-fluctuating reservation areas includes four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area).

In each holding area, according to the reception history (reception order) of the holding control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the holding control command (whether the winning is based on which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, etc.), Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of pending changes and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a gaming state notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), in step SB4107, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj included in the gaming state notification command ( (any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a variable pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is time to start variable display on the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SB4113. The process is performed and the process moves to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed on the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of the variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, a production pattern related to the variation display of decorative symbols is selected, and the display is stopped after the variation time has elapsed based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Determine the stopping symbols (combination of stopping symbols) to be executed. Information regarding the production pattern and stop symbols determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation holding area. Note that the correspondence between variable time information and performance patterns and the correspondence between jackpot type information and stopped symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table.

In addition, in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "probable variable jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small win" are generated. , the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "completely off", respectively, the values of the game state judgment value Xj are "0" to " 7" A plurality of corresponding table groups are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode on the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state judgment value The table corresponding to the values of Xj ("0" to "7") is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a symbol command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), symbol setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing is ended.

In the symbol setting process of step SB4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. It is set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the zero, 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and back out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “BZ6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is set as a stop symbol in accordance with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the production display device 42. decide.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command matches the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, if both values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on at step SB4115, and at step SB4117, the value of the gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the error notification may be performed using the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function described above, it becomes possible to set the gaming machines in the high probability mode from the beginning of business at the gaming hall, which is commonly called "morning." Such acts are carried out by the game hall in order to increase its ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players may be turned into a prank. Various methods can be considered to set the above action, but one example is a method of not initializing and resetting a gaming machine whose gaming mode was the high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present embodiment, in which information regarding the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is transmitted from the main controller to the sub-control device by a return command or the like when the pachinko machine is powered on, etc. If the cable connector connecting the main controller and sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main controller, and will not be able to grasp the initial gaming mode. In other words, control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

Further, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting gaming mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode", such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, is set, the high probability mode is activated by the above action, and the gaming hall starts operating. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SB3901, the process moves to step SB3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SB3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, it is used to set the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5, the accessory effect counter CB8, and each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area. Upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot (“probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot”) occurs. In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and five even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example. If is 0, it is "1" (lower number), if it is 1, it is "3" (lower number), if it is 2, it is "5" (lower number), and if it is 3, it is "7" (lower number). A combination of odd jackpot symbols is determined, such as "9" (double number) if the number is 4.

Also, if the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" If it is 1, it will be “2”, if it is 2, it will be “4”, if it is 3, it will be “6”, if it is 4, it will be “ A combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as ``8'' (double number).

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You can also do this.

The accessory production counter CB8 is for determining whether or not to perform an accessory production (additional production), which will be described later, and its type. As the accessory production counter CB8, 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared. That is, the accessory effect counter CB8 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 399, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 399).

The accessory performance counter CB8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553. Then, it will be taken into account in the accessory performance setting process of step SB3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since each column displays one of 10 decorative symbols, 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the center/miss symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down/out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step SB4001. Further, if the top/miss symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step SB4002. Then, if it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL (step SB4001 is YES), the process advances to step SB4003, and the top/miss symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the center/out symbol counter CM (step SB4002 is YES), the process advances to step SB4004, and the center/out symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the down/out symbol counter CR (both steps SB4001 and SB4002 are NO), the process advances to step SB4005, and the down/out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SB4003 to SB4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted. , the calculation results are set as the current values of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, each of the upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. Never. As a result, one set of missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step SB4006, the combination of the updated missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas If it is a combination of reachable symbols (YES in step SB4006), further in step SB4007, it is determined whether or not the symbol is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area. Determine whether or not. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back missed reach (front and back missed symbols) (step SB4007 is YES), proceed to step SB4008, and check the combination of the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. It is stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffers in the RAM 553. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front and back miss) (symbols other than front and back miss) (step SB4007 is NO), the process advances to step SB4009, and the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time are The combinations are stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back.

In addition, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (step SB4006 is NO), the process advances to step SB4010, and it is determined whether the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination, If it is a combination of losing symbols (completely missing symbols) (step SB4010 is YES), the process advances to step SB4011, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553. do. Note that if both step SB4006 and step SB4010 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols, but in this case, the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are buffered. The process ends without storing the data in the file.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in step SB3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. The display setting process mainly includes a variable display setting process for performing a variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42, a hold display setting process for holding a hold display, and the like.

First, the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 84. As shown in FIG. 84, in step SB4301, the setting status of the variable display flag is checked to determine whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display. In detail, if the fluctuating display flag is set (on), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the fluctuating flag is cleared (off), the fluctuating display is It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which is a stopped state. As described above, the fluctuating display flag is turned on when starting the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 (start setting process of step SB4113), and is turned on when the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 is stopped (step SB4113). (see SB4305).

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the fluctuation has started or if the fluctuation is in progress, the process advances to step SB4302, and if a negative determination is made, the present process is directly ended.

In step SB4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the fluctuation display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

The process then proceeds to step SB4303, where it is determined whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303.

If a negative determination is made in step SB4303, a variation execution process is performed in step SB4304 to execute a variation display on the effect display device 42, and this process is ended.

In this variation execution process, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example. .

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the effect display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SB4305, the stop display setting for performing a stop display on the effect display device 42 is set. and end this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command that instructs the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution processing of step SB4304, production mode switching setting processing for performing the display mode on the production display device 42 in a mode (production mode) according to the type of gaming state is also performed.

The performance mode in this embodiment is a state in which a "normal mode" is not provided with a "high support mode" and a state in which a "high support mode" is provided, depending on the gaming state (value of the gaming state determination value Xj). ``Chance mode'', which has an unknown duration, and ``Until next time/high support mode'', and ``Gold mode'' which explicitly informs the player. It is set to switch between.

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state judgment value Since the state is in a "potential state", even in such a case, the performance mode in the performance display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" so that the state is superficially the same as the "normal state".

When the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5", or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , "30 times/High support mode", "40 times/High support mode", "50 times/High support mode", "30 times/High support mode S", "Until next time/High support mode" non-announcement effects Alternatively, during the period of "support continuous performance" which will be described later, the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 95).

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85. First, in step SB4501, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start prize opening 33YB among the sub-variation reservation areas is information corresponding to a small win (small win). (win information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if small win information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal hold display, hold images TA1 to TA1 corresponding to four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas) are displayed in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, respectively. TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SB4502, the display is updated to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lighting mode or a light out mode, in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of hold images in the sub-variable hold area. Processing will be carried out.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4501, that is, if small hit information is included in any of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area, reservation display change processing is performed in step SB4503. After that, this process ends.

By performing the pending display change process in step SB4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the above-mentioned small winning information are One of them is replaced with the "star-shaped image" from the "holding lamp image" that is normally displayed on hold. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Furthermore, if a command related to voice, such as a notification of an error occurrence, is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SB3909.

In step SB3910, accessory effect setting processing is executed. In the accessory performance setting process, various settings regarding the accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 are performed. Note that the accessory performance setting process is a process that is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, which will be described later, and is executed only when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed. It is processing. Details of the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be described later.

In step SB3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed with no variable display on the effect display device 42) are performed. .

In step 3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner. Furthermore, when performing the accessory performance, various control signals such as motor control signals (drive pulse signals) are output to the performance accessory units 761, 762, etc.

After the processes in steps SB3905 to SB3912, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SB3904, the process moves to step SB3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SB3914, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step SB3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode etc. on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be explained together with the flow of the game by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the gaming state determination value (See Figure 92). Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set which instructs (recommends) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and further below it shows the pending number of variable displays. A hold display area W3 is set.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-change hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 92).

Holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an off state (see the shaded area) during normal times (when not on hold), and when a variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, the corresponding The pending images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area are switched to be displayed in a lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 92, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit mode, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lit mode. The condition is shown. In other words, the fluctuation display is held in the reservation first area and the reservation second area of the first sub-variation reservation area, and the current number of reservations in the fluctuation display is "2" related to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 is displayed with "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33YA.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed in an unreachable position, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the performance display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in the order of decreasing numbers). displayed in increasing order). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area, and decorative symbols Z are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the winning of a game ball to the upper starting winning hole 33YA, a decorative pattern Z of a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after reaching a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols Z of a jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in line on any of the five lines in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and a game ball can enter the jackpot opening, and a predetermined jackpot effect is displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. will be started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game balls flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left-handed", the game ball cannot be won into the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area W2 displays an action in which the player fires a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such action is described below). , "Right-handed hit") is displayed as "Right-handed hit →". Accordingly, the player plays a jackpot game by switching from "hitting left" to "hitting right" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35. .

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, on the way to the variable winning device 32, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y). The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Here, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state, and the game ball will not be able to win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the jackpot ends, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42) display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" will be added as a mode.

Accordingly, on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

Further, during the support performance, a support number display area W4 is set on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIGS. 94 and 95). The support count display area W4 apparently displays the support count that has been confirmed to be provided. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the number of support will be given "50 times" in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation purposes.

More specifically, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" and win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When the "50 times/high support mode" is granted, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

Similarly, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", you can win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode". - Even when the "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded, that is, the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2" or "5". In the case of (excluding Xj=“5” in the case of non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game ends, the player can not open or close the winning combination. It is preferable to continue "hitting to the right" in order to obtain an opportunity to open object 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode", the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the right". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 during the "high support mode", "Right hit →" is displayed to recommend "Right hit" to the player.

In this embodiment, when the normal number of times changes in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 does not show the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj The fluctuation time when is "1", "2", "4", and "5" is set to "1 second" by the fluctuation pattern table selected based on each gaming state judgment value Xj (at the time of jackpot except for). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

On the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 during the above-mentioned specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), a support continuation performance that excites the player's interest is displayed, such as determining whether or not the "high support mode" continues by lottery. It is done.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 96, a roulette symbol TR is displayed. The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the roulette symbol TR rotates and the subsequent gaming state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Here, the item to stop at depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times") or "until next time". ”) and the number of support grants at that time (the value of the support number counter). The determined item is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

For example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the number of support display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, "←Left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a.

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small win information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area related to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, , among the pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area storing the small winning information is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. (See FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image". In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if small win information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will receive a small win. This suggests that this will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, so if you switch from the “left hitting” state to “right hitting” after the small winning occurs, it will not be in time, and the variable winning device 32 will not open in time. In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to hit it "right-handed" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the small win suggestion allows the player to understand that a small win will occur, so he can prepare in advance and miss out on a small win.

As described above, when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, a performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 may be performed as an additional performance. .

Here, the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 98 and 99.

First, in step SB6001, it is determined whether or not the current variation is the execution time of the roulette performance (support continuous performance), taking into consideration the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if the determination is negative, that is, if it is not the time to perform the roulette effect, in step SB6002, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0", and the process is immediately terminated.

The performance state flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance state of the additional performance (mainly the performance performance using the performance accessory units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6001, that is, if the current variation is the execution time of the roulette effect, the process moves to step SB6003.

In step SB6003, it is determined whether or not the additional performance is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0), taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the additional effect has started (JF≧1), the process moves to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6003, that is, if it is before the start of additional effects, the process moves to step SB6004.

At step SB6004, based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the performance performance and its type.

The correspondence between the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 and whether or not the accessory performance is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as an accessory performance pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette performance of the performance display device 42, a plurality of accessory performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display item of the roulette symbol TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the number of supports ends here, "+10" indicates that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "Until next time" indicates that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Corresponding to the three confirmed display items, such as ``end'', role model performance pattern determination table, ``+10 times'', role model performance pattern determination table, and ``until next time'', role model performance pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected differs depending on whether they correspond to "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support is continued, or if it corresponds to "until next time", than in the case of "end", whether or not to execute the role performance, and furthermore, the development performance pattern described later. The various tables are configured to increase the rate at which this is done.

For example, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "end", the "end"/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 249, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CB8 is CB8=250 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8=250 to 299, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8=300 to 329, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8= In the case of 330 to 359, the accessory production of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 360 to 379, the accessory production of the "third development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 380 to 389. If CB8=390 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fourth development pattern" is executed, and if CB8=390 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fifth development pattern" is executed. Note that the details of the accessory effects of these first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

Further, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "until next time", the "until next time" time/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 9, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CB8 is CB8=10 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8=10 to 99, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8=100 to 199, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and CB8= In the case of CB8=200-249, the accessory effect of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8=250-299, the accessory effect of the "third development pattern" is executed, and when CB8=300-349. If CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fourth development pattern" is executed, and if CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fifth development pattern" is executed.

Note that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character performance pattern determination table, which is referred to when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 times", are omitted from illustration, but are similar to those mentioned above. A table with contents different from the ``'End'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' and the ``'Until next time'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' is set.

Here, when the above-mentioned "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The accessory performance pattern flag PF is discrimination information for determining the accessory performance pattern.

Similarly, when the "undeveloped pattern" accessory performance is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the accessory performance of the "first development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the accessory performance of the "second development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "3". When the accessory performance of the "third development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "4". When the accessory performance of the "fourth development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "5". When the accessory performance of the "fifth development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when performing the performance determination process in step SB6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined one from among the plurality of role object performance pattern determination table groups based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette performance. An accessory performance pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and an accessory performance pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553.

Then, in the following step SB6005, a start request setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "1" indicating that the start request period for the accessory performance is in progress, and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (main In the embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds).

Note that the operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process for performing a start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 to prompt the player to press the effect button 125. A display effect prompting operation is executed.

Now, in Step SB6006, which is proceeded to after a negative determination is made in Step SB6003, it is determined whether or not it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF=1), taking into account the value of the production status flag JF. Discern. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the period for requesting the start of the accessory production (JF≧2), the process moves to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6006, that is, if it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance, it is determined in step SB6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the period of requesting the start of the accessory production, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step SB6008.

In step SB6008, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6007, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SB6009.

In step SB6009, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the period of requesting the start of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). Discern.

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether or not the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, and if the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, its value is "1". , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6009, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SB6010.

In the performance pattern setting process of step SB6010, a value corresponding to the performance pattern selected in the performance determination process of step SB6004 is set as the value of the performance status flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF, if "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, if "Accessory effect is included (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the performance state flag JF Set the value to "3".

Thereafter, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing is ended.

Now, in step SB6012 to which the process proceeds after a negative determination is made in step SB6006, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no accessory performance (JF=2)", taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance pattern is "no accessory performance", notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By performing this notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 displays a notification performance that notifies the user that the accessory performance will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunate that it does not move". executed.

Thereafter, in step SB6014, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6012, the process moves to step SB6015, and it is determined whether or not the value of the production state flag JF is "3".

If an affirmative determination is made here, it is assumed that although the production pattern is "with accessory production (JF = 3)", it is currently in the stage before starting the production of the accessory drive, and in step SB6016 Perform setting processing and end this processing.

In the superior object drive setting process of step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads the superior object performance control data that defines the operation progress process of the superior object performance from the ROM 552, and stores this in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. .

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the superior role performance control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

The plurality of motion process data includes, for example, drive control of the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper performance accessory unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable accessory 811. The data includes data specifying an operation process such as controlling the upper rotor 820, and data specifying an operation process such as rotating or stopping the upper rotor 820 by controlling the drive motor 821 for the upper rotor 820. .

As a result, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern is "with accessory performance", when the player presses the performance button 125, the upper movable accessory 811 is first moved to the standby position (the upper side of the center frame 47). 47a) to the lower performance position (see FIGS. 56 and 58).

Then, after the upper movable accessory 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover a part of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate clockwise at a constant speed.

At the same time, on the display section 42a, the roulette symbol TR (see FIG. 96) is displayed in a reduced size and hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, making it difficult for the player to see it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108, various display objects are displayed on the display section 42a around the roulette symbol TR along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped light emitting points EG are displayed blinking along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828. As a result, the display target (for example, the star-shaped light emitting point EG) located at the position through which the magnifying lens section 828 passes is displayed in an enlarged manner through the magnifying lens section 828, and is visible to the player. Of course, the display target displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light emitting point EG illustrated in FIG. 108, and a configuration in which a different display target is displayed may be adopted.

Note that when the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the various performance patterns (motion process data) is set to the value of the predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, the rotation continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". Note that the process timer subtraction process is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal process.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the upper rotary body 820 enters the constant speed rotation state (after the series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the performance state flag JF to the value after the start of execution of the accessory performance. "4" is set to indicate that the operation is valid, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation valid timer ST.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing a development request display effect is performed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display target, the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a message such as "Please press the button" to show the player the effect button. A display effect prompting the user to operate 125 is executed.

Now, in step SB6017 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step SB6015, taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF, the current performance initial state (JF=4 ).

In the present embodiment, the performance modes in the initial state of the performance after the start of execution of the role performance and before the development of the performance are "first development pattern", "second development pattern", "third development pattern", and " This is the same regardless of whether the "fourth development pattern" or the "fifth development pattern" is set.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the performance is not in the initial state of the accessory performance (JF≧5), the process moves to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6017, that is, in the initial state of the accessory performance (independently rotating state of the upper rotating body 820), in step SB6018, the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the performance button 125 during the initial state of the accessory performance, and the operation validity period expires. If the time has passed, the process moves to step SB6019.

In step SB6019, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SB6020.

In step SB6020, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period), taking into consideration the value of the button operation flag BF. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6020, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance button 125 is pressed, then in step SB6021, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF corresponds to the "no development pattern (lower accessory performance pattern)". It is determined whether it is "1" or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the effect pattern is a "no-development pattern," a no-development effect setting process is performed in step SB6022.

By performing such a no-development effect setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a notification that the development effect will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunately, no development". The performance is executed.

Thereafter, in step SB6023, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6021, the process moves to step SB6024 and determines whether the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "2" corresponding to the "first development pattern (pattern without enlargement stop)". Determine whether

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "first developed pattern," a first developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6025, and the present process is ended.

In the first advanced performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "7", which means that the accessory performance has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the first development pattern from the ROM 552. The first development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the first development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

Note that, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns, the plurality of operation process data includes, for example, controlling the drive motor 821 for the upper rotary body to rotate or stop the upper rotary body 820, etc. The data that defines the operation process of the lower movable accessory unit 762 and the vertical drive mechanism 852 (vertical drive motor 860) are controlled to raise, lower, or stop the lower movable accessory unit 762. data that defines the operation process such as controlling the drive motors 855A, 855B for the lower rotary bodies to rotate or stop the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B, etc. It is.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the first development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the first development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Incidentally, although the same applies to the following various advanced effect patterns, the process timer subtraction process is separately performed in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal process. In addition, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, and the upper movable accessory Various controls related to the accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 will be performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to various advanced production patterns is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". This will be done.

Under such a configuration, when the first advanced effect pattern is executed in this embodiment (the same applies when the following various advanced effect patterns are executed), first, the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A is visually recognized. Control is performed to reduce the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 to the extent possible. At the same time, a setting process is performed to output a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "Big or Small", etc.) from the speaker SP as a development notification performance. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the audio setting process in step SB3909.

Subsequently, control is performed to rotate the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B while raising the lower movable accessory 851 from the standby position on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 (see FIG. 56).

Here, the lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate clockwise at a constant speed, and the lower right rotating body 856B is configured to rotate counterclockwise at a constant speed. In addition, the rotational speeds of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are adjusted to such an extent that the player can visually recognize the characters such as "SMALL" and "BIG" written in each of the information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb. The speed is set to slow.

After that, when the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B reach the predetermined performance position in front of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the lower movable accessory 851 rises while maintaining the rotational movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B. Only the operation is stopped. As a result, the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are in a rotating state at positions rearward of the orbit of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotary body 820 (see FIG. 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is such that at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap; and a condition where at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlap. Changes to

In the first development effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the final stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 is the first information writing portion 856Aa of the lower left rotary body 856A ( It does not match the stop position of any of the stop positions of the second information writing section 856Ab (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing section 856Ab (strong/SMALL), and the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing section of the lower right rotating body 856B The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are moved so that the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are in a state that does not coincide with any of the stop positions of the portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "stopped state without enlarged display"). stops and finishes the performance.

However, the combination of the stopping states of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B in the "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination illustrated in FIG. 109, but may be a combination different from this. The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to stop at this point. At this time, the combination pattern of these stopping modes may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6024, the process moves to step SB6026, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "3", which corresponds to the "second development pattern (weak/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern," a second development effect setting process is performed in step SB6027, and the present process ends.

In the second advanced effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the second development pattern from the ROM 552. The second development effect control data that defines the following is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the second development effect control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the second development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the second development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the second advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "weak/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower right rotary body 856B stops in the "weak/SMALL enlarged stop state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 110, and the lower right rotary body 856B may It may be configured to stop. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory production counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6026, the process moves to step SB6028, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "4", which corresponds to the "third development pattern (strong/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "third developed pattern," a third developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6029, and the present process is ended.

In the third advanced performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory performance.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the third development pattern from the ROM 552. The third development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the third advanced performance control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the third development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the third development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the third advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, after the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state will be referred to as "strong/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower right rotating body 856B stops when the "strong/SMALL enlarged stop state" is reached is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 111, and the lower right rotating body 856B may be stopped in a manner different from this. It may be configured to stop. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6028, the process moves to step SB6030, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "5", which corresponds to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "fourth developed pattern," a fourth developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6031, and the present process is ended.

In the fourth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the fourth development pattern from the ROM 552. The fourth development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the fourth development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the fourth development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the fourth advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotary body 856B finally match, that is, the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 matches, A state in which the specific movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EA1, and the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B stops at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the state is "weak/BIG enlargement stop state"), and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower left rotating body 856A stops in the "weak/BIG enlargement stop state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a manner different from this. It may also be a configuration. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory production counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6030, the process moves to step SB6032, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "6", which corresponds to the "fifth development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "fifth developed pattern," a fifth developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6033, and the present process is ended.

In the fifth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the fifth development pattern from the ROM 552. The fifth development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the fifth advanced production control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the fifth development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the fifth advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, after the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotary body 856B finally match, that is, the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 matches A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1, and the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state will be referred to as " The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the state of "strong/BIG enlargement stop state" is reached, and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower left rotary body 856A stops when the "strong/BIG enlargement stop state" is reached is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotary body 856A stops in a manner different from this. It may also be a configuration. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035 to which the judgment is negative in step SB6017 and the transition is made, it is determined whether or not the role performance is currently in the developing state (JF=5), taking into consideration the value of the production state flag JF. . If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6035, that is, if the accessory performance is in the developing state (the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in operation), the process moves to step SB6036.

In step SB6036, it is determined whether the value of the process timer is "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6036, that is, if it is the end timing of the accessory performance, end setting processing is performed in step SB6037, and the present processing is ended.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the accessory performance end control data that defines the end process of the accessory performance, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, the upper rotary body 820 (upper rotary body drive motor 821) is stopped, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower rotary body drive motors 855A, 855B) are stopped, and the upper movable accessory 811 is moved to the standby position. The operation setting process for raising the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, the operation setting process for lowering the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, etc. are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating body that is movable in a predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and The relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in is a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the first rotating body and at least a portion of the second rotating body do not overlap; Under a configuration that can be changed to a second positional relationship in which a portion of the second rotating body overlaps with at least a portion of the second rotating body, in the first positional relationship, light emitted from the light emitting means through the transparent portion of the first rotating body becomes visible, and in the second positional relationship, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating body that overlaps with the transparent portion of the first rotating body. It is configured so that

In this way, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap and move apart, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. becomes possible.

In particular, in this embodiment, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform motion effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body as well as effects using light. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of the first type in which a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB. It is a gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. Note that the gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to players, special prize states (rounds) awarded during jackpots, gaming modes such as high probability modes awarded after jackpots, etc. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, it is equipped with a variable winning device that opens when a small win is won in a lottery based on the ball entering a predetermined starting winning section, and the game ball that enters the variable winning device is placed in a predetermined special winning section ( It may also be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a jackpot state occurs when a ball enters the V-winning slot. Here, when a game ball enters the starting winning section, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section, It may be configured such that the variable winning device is in an open state, and a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a V winning hole or the like to generate a jackpot state.

Furthermore, it may be implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that has both the functions of the first type gaming machine and the functions of the second type gaming machine.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities associated with various types of lottery related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Furthermore, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) occur, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) occur, etc. are set, but the number of rounds is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other different jackpot states occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. Good too.

In addition, this pachinko machine does not change the lottery mode (``high probability mode'' or ``low probability mode''), but only switches to the winning support mode (``high support mode'' or ``low support mode''). It's okay. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as a high support mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is constructed based on a transparent plate that is a light-transmitting member, but is not limited to this, and may be constructed from an opaque member such as wood that does not have light-transmitting properties. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the game area, and the configuration is such that various light emitting effects can be performed. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A, other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device may be arranged at the rear of the game board 30.

(d-2) In place of or in addition to the above embodiment, a light emitting device such as a lamp or an LED is arranged at at least one of the top, bottom, left and right end faces of the game board 30 so as to face the end face. , the light emitted from the light emitting means enters into the game board 30, and a part of the light is emitted from a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 30, making it visible to the player. Good too. In other words, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, a portion of the light incident from the first position in the front view of the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 is emitted from the second position in the front view of the front part of the game board 30, and becomes visible to the player. It is also possible to have a configuration like this.

(d-3) In place of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display screen having a size that covers substantially the entire back side of the gaming area or substantially the entire back side of the gaming board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 It is also possible to have a configuration including a display device having.

Further, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. At this time, nails or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the performance display device 42, to make this an area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be an area where the game ball cannot fall.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body of the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 which is the first rotating means (first rotating body) is the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). Although it is configured to rotate on the front side, the area in which the first rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates in the front area of the center frame 47. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotation operation in an internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

Further, in the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

(e-2) The moving mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, as the support arm 814 swings and displaces, the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) moves between the standby position on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47 and the display part of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced to the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position of the upper rotary body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) may be configured to linearly move between the standby position and the performance position, such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, or may be configured to move in a linear manner. It may be configured to move between the standby position and the presentation position by combining a plurality of movements such as curvilinear movements. Of course, the first rotating means may be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration related to the light-transmitting portion are not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to include six movable pieces 825 imitating flower petals as transparent parts, but the number, arrangement, shape, etc. of the transparent parts may vary. The present invention is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted. It is also possible to have a configuration including only one light-transmitting portion.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is a light-transmitting portion, is slid in the radial direction of the upper rotary body 820, and the upper rotary body 820 is configured to expand or contract in diameter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a structure in which the light-transmitting part does not displace in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, a structure in which the size of the first rotating means does not change, may be used. For example, the first rotating means may be a circular disk when viewed from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the general part of each movable piece 825 is made of a semi-transparent member that makes it difficult to identify the display target displayed on the display unit 42a, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display object may be made of an identifiable transparent member.

Further, the movable piece 825 does not need to be made of a light-transmitting material, and the movable piece 825 may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may have a configuration in which a through hole or a notch through which light can be transmitted (visually recognized) is formed. Alternatively, a first rotating means may be employed in which a predetermined number of through holes, etc., which serve as light-transmitting portions, are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of a circular disc body when viewed from the front. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, it acts on the acted parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating body). As an action part, a magnifying lens part 828 is formed in one movable piece 825 (specific movable piece 825A) among the six movable pieces 825.

The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the magnifying lens section 828 is omitted. Further, instead of or in addition to the enlarging lens section 828, a reducing lens section may be provided as the action section. By using this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the affected parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in a reduced size.

(e-5) The rotational drive source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotary body 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotary body drive motor 821 as the drive source, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other actuators such as a solenoid may be employed as the rotational drive source. It's okay.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is rotated using a game ball that is driven into the game area. For example, a rotary drive member such as a water wheel is disposed inside the outlet 36, and a drive transmission mechanism for transmitting the force of the rotary drive member to the first rotating means is disposed, and the outflow that is frequently discharged from the outlet 36 is disposed. The first rotating means may be rotationally driven using a ball. Further, the first rotating means may be configured to rotate by using a game ball flowing down a predetermined position in the game area. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the first rotation means can rotate using the game ball fired into the game area by the firing means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body of the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the plate-shaped lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are substantially rectangular in front view, are used as the second rotating means (second rotating body), but the number of second rotating means The configuration, shape, and configuration of the information writing section are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, either the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and a configuration may be provided in which only one second rotating means is provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with three or more 2nd rotation means.

The second rotating means may include, for example, a rotating body that is circular in front view and is rotatable with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, and the rotating body may include one or more information writing sections.

(f-2) As the second rotating means, a rotating body having a different shape such as a spherical shape may be employed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, as a movable accessory related to the second rotating means (second rotating body), there is a predetermined support 880 that is movably provided by a moving drive means (not shown), and A accommodating part 881 provided at the upper end, a spherical member 882 as a spherical second rotation means (spherical body) accommodated in the accommodating part 881, and for controlling the posture and orientation of the spherical member 882. A movable accessory may be employed that is equipped with a rotation driving means including a plurality of actuators (not shown) or the like.

In the movable accessory illustrated in FIG. 114, information writing portions 884 provided at multiple locations (for example, 4 locations) on the surface of the ball member 882 are inserted through an opening 883 formed in the front surface of the container 881. One of them becomes visible. In the information writing section 884, for example, character information such as "Atari" or "Loss" may be written.

Here, the ball member 882 may be made of a translucent member. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means disposed behind the housing section 881 enters the ball member 882 through the rear opening (not shown) of the housing section 881, and enters the ball member 882 through the opening 883 to play the game. It may also be made visible to the public.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Then, light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is irradiated onto the ball member 882 from the front through the opening 883. The player may be able to visually recognize the light reflected by the player.

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are configured to be rotatable with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, but the rotational axis direction of the second rotation means is not limited to this. .

For example, the ball member 882 as the second rotation means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, or diagonal direction as the rotation axis direction. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis direction (attitude) of the second rotation means can be changed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball member 882 are provided at eight corners of the accommodating portion 881, and by controlling the ball receiving members, the ball receiving member is A configuration may also be adopted in which three-dimensional attitude control of the spherical member 882 is performed through the spherical member 882.

(f-4) The information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the above embodiment are made of a translucent material, and the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from it at a predetermined transmittance.

However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least the information writing section 856Aa and the like (or the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) may be made of an opaque material (for example, a metal material) that does not have light-transmitting properties. Further, by performing polishing, plating, or the like on the information writing section 856Aa, etc., it may be made into a reflective section that can reflect light.

The light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is transmitted from the front through the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820 to the information writing section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which 856Aa or the like is irradiated.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can visually recognize the information written in the information writing section 856Aa or the like through the magnifying lens section 828.

Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex toward the outside. With this configuration, not only light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also light irradiated from multiple directions such as the side of the game board 30 can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

(f-5) The moving mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment described above, the lower movable accessory 851 is provided with a vertical drive mechanism 852 that moves the lower movable accessory 851 up and down, and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are placed between the standby position on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47 and the display section of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced in the vertical direction between it and the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the left-right direction, front-back direction, etc.

In addition, in a configuration that is movable in the front-rear direction, for example, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30. Further, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction in the rear region of the game board 30. At this time, a configuration may be provided in which a guide member is provided as a rear guide means that can guide the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Further, the lower left rotary body 856A and the lower right rotary body 856B may be configured to be movable independently and relatively movable. Of course, each may be configured to be movable individually in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc. Furthermore, each may be configured to be movable individually from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30, or each may be configured to be individually movable in the rear area of the game board 30.

In addition, the moving path, moving speed, rotational speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set in multiple ways (multiple patterns), and the moving path, moving speed, rotating speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are changed as appropriate. Good too. In addition, a configuration may be provided that includes a route changing means that can execute a process of changing the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined lottery is conducted to change the moving route, and the moving route of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is determined based on the result of this lottery.

(f-6) The rotational drive source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotary body drive motors 855A and 855B as the drive source, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other rotary drive sources such as solenoids may be used. An actuator may also be used.

Further, a predetermined movable member that can contact the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and can cause a change in the movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B is provided, and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are moved by the force received from the movable member. It may also be a configuration.

For example, by colliding a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) with the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in a stopped state, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B start moving or rotating. You can also use it as

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, rotate on the front side of the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the effect display device 42, which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). However, similar to the first rotation means, the area in which the second rotation means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, the internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, and the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30, a configuration is adopted in which the second rotating means is rotatable and movable. Good too. Further, in the rear region of the game board 30, the second rotation means may be configured to perform a rotation operation.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body effect, such as the timing when the rotating body effect is performed using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B), is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed as an additional effect when the continuous support effect (roulette effect) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is performed in different scenes, such as an additional effect of a reach effect, for example.

For example, the above-mentioned pattern without development (rotation performance of only the upper rotary body 820 without any minor role performance) may be used for a one-shot notification performance to notify the player of winning a jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, the lottery performance is performed to determine whether or not to continue the support mode after the jackpot (number of times of support); , a type lottery is held to determine the type of jackpot state (number of rounds) based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and as a performance for teaching the result of the lottery, for example, A configuration may also be adopted in which rotating body effects such as the various advanced effect patterns described above (effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) are performed.

In addition, when performing a rotating body performance during or at the end of a jackpot state, for example, if the lottery result that was suspended when the ball entered a predetermined entry means during the jackpot state includes a jackpot winning result (so-called pending series). occurs), the first information writing section 856Aa of both information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab of the lower left rotating body 856A (or both information writing sections 856Ba, 856Bb of the lower right rotating body 856B) ” (or “BIG” in the first information writing section 856Ba) may be displayed in an enlarged and stopped manner, or may be configured to be more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state. On the other hand, if the reserved lottery results do not include jackpot winning results (so-called pending results do not occur), "WEAK/SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Ab (or "SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Bb) is selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "Weak/BIG") is displayed in an enlarged and stopped state, or a structure in which it is more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be provided (the degree of expectation that gaming value can be provided), the role production, and furthermore the development production (the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotation body 820) The rotating body performance using the rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is performed at a rate that changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (result that gaming value is awarded such as a big hit, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the percentage of role performance and further development performance (rotating body performance using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) being performed is higher than when no winning result is obtained.

In addition, only when the grant of high support mode continues (when the game value is granted), or when a winning result is obtained through the prescribed lottery process (big win, small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a result that a game value is given such as It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done.

(h) In the above embodiment, the upper rotary body, which is the first rotation means, is 820 (magnifying lens section 828) acts, but the structure in which the first rotation means and the second rotation means act on each other is not limited to this, and other structures may be used. May be adopted.

(h-1) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, act on the affected portion of the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotating body 820, a ``specific information writing section (for example, characters such as ``hit'') is provided as an affected section in place of the ``magnifying lens section 828'', and in the lower left rotating body 856A, A "reducing lens section" is provided as a first action section in place of the "first information writing section 856Aa," and a "magnification lens section" is provided as a second action section in place of the "second information writing section 856Ab." Under this configuration, the lower left rotary body 856A is configured to rotate and stop at a position in front of the upper rotary body 820, and when the upper rotary body 820 and the lower left rotary body 856A are stopped, the specific information writing section (“hit” '' etc.) may be displayed in an enlarged manner by an ``enlarging lens section'' or displayed in a reduced size by a ``reducing lens section''.

Furthermore, here, the case where it acts in the second manner (when the display is enlarged by the "magnifying lens section") is better than the case where it operates in the first manner (when the display is reduced in size by the "reducing lens section"). A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. Or, when the game operates in the second manner, the ratio of the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is higher than when the game operates in the first manner. may be configured.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, are close to each other even when they are close to each other. It is configured to maintain a separated state.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may be able to come into contact with each other in a close state.

For example, when the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are stopped, the peripheral edge of the action part (magnifying lens part 828) of the upper rotary body 820 is It is also possible to have a configuration in which the parts are in contact with each other. This makes it difficult for a gap to occur between the peripheral edge of the information writing portions 856Aa, etc. of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the peripheral edge of the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotary body 820. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking from the gap and the leaked light making it difficult to visually recognize the information writing section 856Aa or the like or reducing the brightness of the information writing section 856Aa or the like.

(i) In the above embodiment, a performance button 125 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as an operation means for performance. The configuration of the operating means and the performance using the same are not limited to the above embodiment.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the performance button 125, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, start operating, and the development performance (the upper rotary body 825 and rotating body effects using lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the advanced performance is started in accordance with a predetermined performance program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operating mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever is provided as a first operation part that can adjust the amount of movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B in the left-right direction, and a second operation part that can determine the start timing and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B. A production button 125 may be provided as the operation unit, and the coordinate position at which the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B rotate can be adjusted two-dimensionally in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In addition, at the stage of performing the above-mentioned development effect, in conjunction with the movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B rising, while displaying the character on the display section 42a, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are pressed down to execute the development effect. A display effect is performed to prevent the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward, and the player repeatedly presses the effect button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(i-3) A configuration may be provided with a return regulating means (for example, a ratchet mechanism) capable of regulating the return of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B guided to the production area to outside the predetermined area (standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B to operate more stably in the production area.

(j) In the above embodiment, various performances related to the rotating body performance are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in accordance with a predetermined performance program. It is configured to be carried out.

The present invention is not limited to this, and includes a detection means capable of detecting the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B passing a predetermined position in the production area (predetermined area), and based on the fact that the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are detected by the detection means, The configuration may be such that various effects related to rotating body effects can be executed.

For example, when the player is configured to be able to determine the coordinate position at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B rotate in two dimensions, vertically, horizontally, and horizontally as described above, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B determined by the player The coordinate position may be specified by a plurality of detection means, and the rotation mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the magnifying lens section 828 may be changed in accordance with the specified coordinate position.

Note that any type of detection means may be used as long as it is capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, but considering that the production area is an area that is visible to the player. Therefore, it is preferable to use a type that can detect the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in a non-contact manner, such as a distance measuring sensor.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the rotating bodies such as the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. In view of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper rotary body 820, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B, etc. are provided with a grounding structure that releases static electricity.

For example, the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are provided with a conductive portion having conductivity, and a predetermined conductive member having conductivity is provided outside the production area (predetermined area) such as the center frame 47, When the rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in a standby state, the conductive parts of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be in contact with a conductive member such as the center frame 47. By electrically connecting a conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown), static electricity charged on the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are relatively simply configured, may have a configuration in which at least a portion or the entirety thereof is formed of a conductive metal material. Instead of or in addition to this, the surfaces of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be plated or the like.

Further, a long conductive member made of a conductive material is disposed along a part of the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move from a predetermined standby position to the production area (predetermined area). You can also use it as

Further, among the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, at least the conductive portion that contacts the conductive member may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex to the outside. In other words, a configuration including a conductive portion having a hemispherical convex shape may be used.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional subject VA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, making the performance of the rotating means monotonous. There was a desire for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VA1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
A second player that is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotational state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a transparent portion that can transmit light. one rotation means;
and a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of the predetermined area is,
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
In the first positional relationship,
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A game machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting device can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating device that overlaps with a transparent portion of the first rotating device. .

In addition, examples of the above-mentioned "predetermined trigger" include "the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means provided within the gaming area" (the same applies to the various means described below). .

In addition, providing "gaming value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and providing special gaming conditions (such as winning conditions and game modes) that are advantageous to the player. (The same applies to the various methods below).

Furthermore, the configuration in which the second rotation means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotation means is rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, similar to the first rotation means (the following various means But the same). Of course, the second rotation means may be configured to be rotatable in a manner different from this (the same applies to various means described below). For example, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable with the left-right direction as the axial direction.

Furthermore, the configuration in which "the second rotating means is movable relative to the first rotating means" means, for example, the center position (rotational This refers to a configuration in which the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotation means can be moved in the vertical direction, left and right direction, etc., with reference to the position of the axis (the position of the axis) (the same applies to the various means described below). Therefore, when the predetermined area is viewed from the front, the positional relationship between the center position of the first rotation means and the center position of the second rotation means does not change, that is, the centers of the two rotation means are arranged on the same axis in the front and back direction. It does not include a structure in which the positional relationship in front view is fixed and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means changes only in the circumferential direction.

According to the means VA1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

In particular, with this means, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

In addition, as one of the production devices that perform game production using a rotating means, a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the rotating means, and by blinking the light emitting means in a predetermined pattern while rotating the rotating means, an afterimage is generated. Versawriters and the like that display characters, figures, etc. are known as such.

However, in a configuration such as a versatile lighter in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, the rotating means becomes large and heavy, and the operability of the rotating means may deteriorate.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotationally driven rotating means, a signal line is usually connected between the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means and a control device installed outside the rotating means. The power line must be electrically connected via a slip ring or the like, which may complicate wiring and control.

Therefore, in such a performance device, the operability of the rotating means is low, and the motion performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous.

In contrast, according to the present means, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, so there is no need to mount the light emitting means on the rotating means. , it is possible to suppress the increase in size and weight of the rotating means, and improve the operability of each rotating means.

In addition, if one rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the switching speed of the visual recognition mode of light (the speed of the outer circumference of the rotating means), the rotation There is a risk that the load on the means, motor, etc. will increase.

In contrast, according to the present means, by overlapping the two rotating means, it is possible to increase the switching speed of the visual recognition mode of light without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, the durability of the rotating means, motor, etc. can be improved.

Means VA2. than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a second positional relationship (close state),
The gaming machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs at a higher rate.

According to the means VA2, it is possible to perform a game performance in which the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state is changed depending on the difference in the positional relationship (adjacent state) of the two rotating means.

As a result, the player will watch the operation of the second rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can occur,
than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a second positional relationship (close state),
The gaming machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state.

According to the means VA3, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Means VA4. When the predetermined condition is met, compared to when it is not met,
Any one of means VA1 to means VA3 is characterized in that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured such that a ratio (frequency) of the second positional relationship (close state) is increased. The game machine described.

According to the means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), compared to when the predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by a predetermined lottery process). , the first rotation means and the second rotation means are more likely to be in the second positional relationship (close state).

In other words, the rate at which the first rotation means and the second rotation means have the second positional relationship changes depending on the gaming situation. As a result, the game can be varied and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA5. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined region, and the plurality of second rotation means are movable relative to each other,
The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA4, characterized by:

According to the means VA5, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be able to act on the first rotation means individually, thereby further diversifying game performances. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Here, for example, a predetermined second rotation means among the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be able to act on other second rotation means. Thereby, further diversification of game performance can be achieved.

Means VA6. The first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the transparent parts arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means (for example, at predetermined intervals around the rotation axis). arranged at an angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals),
comprising a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emission means.

According to the means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotation means and the flashing period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotation means effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), etc. The apparent operating mode of the rotating means (light-transmitting portion) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and improve the interest for the players.

Here, "blinking control" refers to control in which the light emitting means periodically repeats a lighting state and a non-lighting state.

For example, blinking control in which the blinking cycle of the light emitting means is shorter than the light-transmitting part movement cycle in which the N light-transmitting parts move a distance corresponding to the predetermined interval (the cycle in which the light-transmitting parts move by one formation pitch interval). In the case where the light-emitting means lights up at a predetermined timing and the player visually recognizes the light-transmitting part, the light-transmitting part that is visually recognized by the player has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval when the light-emitting means lights up next time. It will be visible from the front side position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (light-transmitting portion) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, suddenly reverses itself.

Note that there is a mechanical limit to controlling the rotational drive of the rotating means using a motor or the like. Therefore, depending on the mode of operation, the operation may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly reverse the rotation direction of a rotating means (motor) that is rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, there is a risk that the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. will become significantly large. As a result, there is a risk that durability may be reduced due to looseness in the assembled state of the rotating means and the motor.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect as if, for example, the rotating means rotating in the forward direction suddenly reversed, without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and improve the interest for the players.

Means VA7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA6, characterized in that a diameter of the second rotating means when viewed from the front of the predetermined area is smaller than at least a diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means that moves in a predetermined area is relatively large, the load on the drive mechanism etc. will increase due to the influence of inertia, etc., and there is a risk that it will be difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means. be.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned means VA7, braking performance can be improved and the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VA8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, as with means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed to be curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VA9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

According to the means VA9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA9, similarly to means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similarly to means VC4, it may be possible to include "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more." Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA9, similar to the means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VA10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VA11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VA12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA11, characterized in that:

According to the means VA12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA12, as with means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA12, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VA13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of means VA1 to VA12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VA13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be possible to ``equip a path changing means that can change the path of movement of the second rotation means in the front area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, similarly to the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable" may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385). For example, there are devices that perform effects such as lighting up or blinking light emitting means mounted on the rotating means while rotating the rotating means.

Instead of this, for example, it is conceivable to provide a rotating means and a light emitting means separately, and to perform various game effects by rotating the rotating means at a position in front of the light emitting means.

However, under such a configuration, if at least a part of the rotating means is formed of a light-shielding material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of the part will appear dark to the player's eyes, and the design surface will appear dark to the player's eyes. may become difficult to see.

As a result, there is a risk that the design of the rotating means may be degraded, and the player's interest may be diminished.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VB1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
A second player that is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotational state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a transparent portion that can transmit light. Equipped with one rotation means,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate the game machine.

According to the means VB1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means, in the second positional relationship (close state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means overlap, the second rotation means overlaps with the transparent portion of the first rotation means. Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) is irradiated from the front through the transparent portion of the first rotation means onto at least a portion of the reflection portion of the second rotation means.

As a result, even if at least a part of the second rotating means is formed of a light-shielding material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of the part appears dark to the player's eyes, and the design Problems such as surfaces becoming difficult to visually recognize are less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design quality and, in turn, to improve the interest for the players.

Means VB2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VB1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB2, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB2, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotational axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined region viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VB3. The gaming machine according to means VB1 or VB2, wherein the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member through which light can pass.

When a light-transmitting member is disposed between the light-emitting means and the first rotation means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reduced by passing through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in an illumination device, in a configuration in which a translucent member such as a cover member is disposed on the front side of an LED as a light emitting means, the brightness of light emitted from the LED etc. It decreases by passing through.

Similarly, in a structure such as a liquid crystal display device, in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members is disposed on the front side of a backlight as a light emitting means, the light emitted from the backlight is The brightness decreases as the light passes through various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration according to the present means VB3, the effects of the means VB1 and the like described above are more effective.

Means VB4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB3, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

According to the above means VB4, the rigidity of the second rotating means can be increased, and the durability and wear resistance can be improved. Furthermore, the reflective portion can be formed by simply polishing a predetermined portion of the second rotating means, thereby simplifying the manufacturing process. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the reflecting portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means) is subjected to rust prevention treatment or the like.

Means VB5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB4, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is subjected to a polishing process.

According to the above-mentioned means VB5, by performing polishing (mirror finish), a more glossy reflective portion can be formed. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB5, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.).

According to the means VB6, it is possible to increase the reflectance of light in the reflecting portion, and the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB6, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside).

According to the means VB7, not only light emitted from the front side of the gaming machine (outside the gaming machine) but also light emitted from multiple directions such as the side of the gaming board can be reflected to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB8. According to any one of the means VB1 to VB7, at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing part in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. Game machine.

According to the means VB8, the predetermined information written in the information writing section of the reflective section can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent section of the first rotating means.

Thereby, it is possible to further diversify the game performance using the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and the effect of the means VB1 can be further enhanced.

Means VB9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VB9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that, similarly to the means VC4, "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more" is provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB9, similar to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning outside the predetermined area (standby position). It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB9, as with means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VB10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any of the means VB1 to VB10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VB12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB11, characterized in that:

According to the means VB12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB12, as in the means VF4, a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VB13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB12, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VB13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be provided that "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating means is provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear region of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional issue VC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the rotating means performs a rotating operation in a preset operation when, for example, a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and the player's interest in the operation of the rotating means tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VC1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by a player.

According to the means VC1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Further, according to the present means, the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to change depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player. Furthermore, the relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can be changed. As a result, the player becomes more aware that he or she is actively participating in the game, and can improve his or her interest in the game.

Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, the information includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine according to means VC1, wherein the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

According to the means VC2, the player himself can determine the timing for starting the operation of the second rotating means, which has been in a standby state until then. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby further increasing interest in the game.

Means VC3. means VC1 or A gaming machine described in VC2.

According to the means VC3, the player can change the amount of movement of the second rotating means based on the amount of operational displacement of the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby further increasing interest in the game.

Means VC4. The game machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC3, characterized in that the game machine includes a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means VC1, etc., if the configuration is such that the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as desired by the player, the amount of movement of the second rotating means may be greater than the amount of movement planned by the developer. There is a possibility that a player may appear who attempts to move the two-rotation means. If an attempt is made to move the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more, there is a risk that the second rotating means will collide with a predetermined portion and the second rotating means or the predetermined portion may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the means VC4, by providing the movement restricting means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced.

Means VC5. The game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC4, further comprising a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means VC1 etc., if a configuration is adopted in which the movement amount of the second rotation means can be changed as desired by the player, the movement distance of the second rotation means can be changed to a predetermined area that becomes the production area of the first rotation means. There is a risk that the second rotating means will not be guided appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC5, the occurrence of the above-described problems can be reduced by providing the guide means.

Means VC6. The means according to any one of the means VC3 to VC5, characterized in that the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating return to outside the predetermined area (standby position). Game machine.

Under the configuration of the above means VC1 etc., if the second rotation means is configured to be able to operate as the player desires, the second rotation means once guided to the predetermined area will be rotated again. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the rotating means returns to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) and the rotating means performance is not performed appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC6, by providing the return regulating means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced.

Means VC7. The operation means includes at least a first operation part that can change the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation part that can select whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation. A gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

According to the above-mentioned means VC7, the player can now make many decisions on his/her own, thereby further strengthening the sense that he/she is actively participating in the game, and further improving his/her interest in the game. can.

Means VC8. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VC1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VC7 to VC7.

According to the means VC8, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first positional relationship (close state), The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC8, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts that are arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VC9. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VC9, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to the means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VC10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VC11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VC12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that:

According to the means VC12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similar to the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" is also provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VC13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC12, wherein the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VC13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be possible to ``equip a path changing means that can change the path of movement of the second rotating means in the front area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VD. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means only performs a predetermined rotational operation, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up or flashes. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to create an effect in which multiple movable bodies including rotating means are linked together, but in such a configuration, the multiple movable bodies may , there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which it is not possible to link or stop the production mode that the player wants to see. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VD1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VD1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are overlapped or separated, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

However, in a configuration in which the second rotating means moves within a predetermined area, there is a risk that the second rotating means may become misaligned due to assembly errors, deterioration over time, or the like. If such a positional shift occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means may not be appropriate, and there is a possibility that the above-mentioned presentation effect may not be produced appropriately.

Note that conventionally, in order to grasp the position of the movable body, a detection means for detecting the movable body at a standby position (reference position) is often provided. However, with this configuration alone, it is not possible to grasp the position of the movable body in the performance area (predetermined area) where the performance is actually performed, so there is a risk that the problems described in the above problem may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means VD1, the detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position is provided in the predetermined area serving as the production area, and the second rotation means is detected by the detection means. Based on this, the system is configured to be able to perform predetermined effects.

This makes it difficult for a time lag to occur between the operating mode of the rotating means and the start timing of the predetermined effect when performing the effect in the predetermined area, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Means VD2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The gaming machine according to means VC1, characterized in that the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VD2, it is possible to perform an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means at an appropriate timing.

Means VD3. A predetermined display means is provided as the light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to means VD2, characterized in that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emission means.

According to the means VD3, it is possible to perform an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the display mode of the display means at an appropriate timing.

Means VD4. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VD2 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. or the gaming machine described in any one of VD3.

According to the means VD4, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state)." It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4 and similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VD5. The detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area,
The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD6. The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD5, characterized in that the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually passable through the predetermined position.

According to the means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD6, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VD7, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing processing" similarly to the means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex outward)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VD8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD7, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VD8, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC2, it may be possible that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similarly to means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, it is also possible to "equip a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more", similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD8, like the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD8, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD8, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VD9, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VD10. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD9, characterized in that:

According to the means VD10, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD10, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD10, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VD11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VD11, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means may be provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, "the direction of the axis of rotation of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional subject VE. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, the rotating means may be charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. When the rotating means is configured to be movable, when the rotating means contacts or comes close to another electrical device (including other rotating means), static electricity flows to the electrical device. Not only the electrical equipment itself but also the gaming machine may be affected greatly.

For example, there are concerns about disturbances in the screen of the display device, noise mixing into control signals, etc., and in severe cases, various problems such as damage to electrical equipment or malfunction of electrical equipment may occur. There is.

As a result, the game performance may not be performed appropriately, and the player's interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VE1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity.

According to the means VE1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the second rotating means has a conductive portion in at least a portion thereof, and is configured to include a conductive member (earth member) that can come into contact with the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

Thereby, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released through the conductive member, and the occurrence of the various problems described above due to static electricity can be suppressed.

Furthermore, malfunctions of various performance devices such as movable accessories and display devices can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest for players can be suppressed.

Means VE2. The gaming machine according to means VE1, characterized in that the conductive member is provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region).

If the conductive member is disposed within a predetermined area serving as a production area, the conductive member will come into contact with the player's eyes, which may reduce the design quality.

On the other hand, according to the means VE2, the occurrence of such problems can be suppressed.

Means VE3. The gaming machine according to means VE1 or VE2, wherein the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotation means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

According to the means VE3, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released during the movement before coming into contact with the first rotating means, and the effect of the means VE1 etc. can be further enhanced. .

Means VE4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE3, wherein the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of a path along which the second rotating means moves.

According to the above means VE4, the second rotating means can easily come into contact with the conductive member, and static electricity can be more reliably released.

Means VE5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE4, wherein at least the conductive part (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside).

According to the means VE5, the contact area between the conductive portion of the second rotating means and the predetermined conductive member can be reduced, and the frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to move the second rotating means smoothly, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the player.

Means VE6. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VE1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine according to any one of VE5 to VE5.

According to the means VE6, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VE7. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE6, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VE7, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VE8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE7, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VE8, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC2, it may be possible that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is determined based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, it may be provided that, similarly to the means VC4, "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more" is provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE8, similarly to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VE9, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE9, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE9, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VE10. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE9, characterized in that:

According to the means VE10, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE10, similarly to means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and can cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means" can also be used. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VE11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VE1 to VE10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VE11, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating means may be provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE11, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear region of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, making the performance of the rotating means monotonous. There was a desire for further improvement in interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide multiple rotating means, but if these simply rotate independently without affecting each other, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and it becomes more interesting. It was hoped that improvements would be made.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VF1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

According to the means VF1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby creating a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means VF1, when the other rotating means (for example, the first rotating means) acts in a predetermined manner on the acted part of one rotating means (for example, the second rotating means), the The one rotating means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to a predetermined mode.

In other words, one rotating means operates in a different manner due to a difference in the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the acted part of one rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operating modes of the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first mode, it operates in a first operation mode corresponding to the first mode;
When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in a second manner, the rotating means is configured to operate in a second operation manner corresponding to the second manner. The gaming machine described in means VF1.

According to the means VF2, the effect of the means VF1 can be further enhanced.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
The gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs at a higher rate.

According to the means VF3, it is possible to perform a game effect in which the rate of achieving a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the operating mode of the rotating means. As a result, the player watches the operation of the rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can occur,
When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
The gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state.

According to the means VF4, the same effects as those of the means VF3 are achieved.

Means VF5. The game machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF4, characterized in that the other rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with an actuated portion of the one rotating means.

If the actuated part is configured as a translucent part that can transmit light, and a gap is created between the actuated part of the other rotating means and one rotating means, the light will pass through the gap. The leaked light may cause problems such as making it difficult to see the affected part or reducing the brightness of the affected part itself.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means VF5, the occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed.

Means VF6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized in that it includes a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means.

According to the means VF6, the operating mode of the second rotating means changes when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means. As a result, the operating modes of the rotating means etc. are diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest for the players.

For example, the second rotating means may be configured to start operating when a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) acts on the second rotating means that is in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VF1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VF6 to VF6.

According to the means VF7, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF7, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF7, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts," light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA7, it may be possible that "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front is smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VF8. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VF8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed to be curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VF9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VF9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, it is also possible to "equip a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more", similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF9, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VF10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VF11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves" You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VF12. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF11, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VF12, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF12, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means may be provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``equip a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position.'' . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VG. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means only performs a predetermined rotational operation, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up or flashes. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to use a plurality of rotating means capable of relative displacement to create a performance, but in such a configuration, the arrangement and operation of one rotating means will affect the operation of the other rotating means. This may make it difficult to create a dynamic performance.

As a result, performances using rotating means tend to become monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VG1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
comprising a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a predetermined area viewed from the front is,
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A game machine characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from a front area to a rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board.

According to the means VG1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Incidentally, if both the first rotation means and the second rotation means are arranged together in the front area (or rear area) of the game board, it is not possible to allow the two rotation means to pass each other due to the front and rear space. There is a risk that the operation of both rotating means may be restricted.

In this regard, according to the present means VG1, the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area of the game board to the rear area and movable in the rear area of the game board, so that The second rotating means can be freely operated at the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotating means arranged in the area.

Further, the player can visually confirm the operation of the second rotating means through the game board made of a translucent member.

As a result, it becomes possible to perform more dynamic and more diverse game presentations, and it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means VG2. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined region, and the plurality of second rotation means are movable relative to each other,
Means VG1 according to the means VG1, characterized in that the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Game machine.

According to the means VG2, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be movable individually to the rear area of the game board, thereby further diversifying game effects. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means VG3. The game machine according to means VG1 or VG2, characterized in that a plurality of paths are provided through which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board.

According to the above means VG3, the operation mode of the second rotating means is diversified, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means VG4. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG3, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a path changing device capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating device in the front area of the game board.

According to the means VG4, the operation mode of the second rotating means can be further diversified, and the interest can be further improved.

Means VG5. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG4, further comprising a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotation means that has moved to a rear region of the game board to a predetermined position.

In the rear area of the game board, many devices such as display devices and presentation devices are installed, so compared to the front area of the game board, there is limited space for moving movable objects. It is required to move the rotation means twice.

On the other hand, according to the means VG5, by providing the rear guide means, it is possible to accurately guide the second rotation means to a predetermined position.

Means VG6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG5, characterized in that the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable.

If the direction of the rotation axis is fixed and the direction of rotation is simply changed, the game performance may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the means VG6, since the rotation axis direction is configured to be changeable, it is possible to perform more diverse performances, and further improve interest.

Means VG7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VG1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VG6 to VG6.

According to the means VG7, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, as in means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number of N pieces (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similarly to means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined region viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VG8. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VG8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VG9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VG9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it is also possible to ``equip a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more'', similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG9, like the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG9, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VG10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the light emission mode of the light emitting means may be such that the display mode of the display means can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VG1 to VG10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VG11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VG12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG11, characterized in that:

According to the means VG12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode". It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG12, as in means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of the means VB1 to VB13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, the structure of a part or all of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, the above means VE1 to VE11 Any part or all of any of the above means VF1 to means VF12, and any part or all of any of the above means VG1 to means VG12. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VB1 to VB13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, or a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VE1 to VE11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (such as a firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing device) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and A game area (game board, etc.) into which game balls are guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, ``a pinball game machine'' which is equipped with a starting prize opening, etc.) and is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(b) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 42... Performance display device, 42a... Display unit, 811... Upper movable accessory, 820... Upper rotating body, 825... Movable piece, 828... Magnifying lens part, 851... Lower movable accessory Object, 856A...lower left rotating body, 856Aa...first information writing section, 856Ab...second information writing section, 856B...lower right rotating body, 856Ba...first information writing section, 856Bb...second information writing section.

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It had an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area. variable entry means;
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the inner area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state providing means capable of providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball enters the special ball entering means,
The variable ball entry means is configured such that only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area,
This gaming machine is
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
By changing the state to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, the value for the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route that can flow down to the special ball entry means. configured to be able to change the value of a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means by a variable means that can change the value of the game ball,
The variable means is configured to perform a predetermined lottery result when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first chance entry means or the second opportunity entry means. configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a regulating means is provided that allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball to pass in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game ball that enters the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter;
This gaming machine is
comprising an award confirmation means for confirming the award of one gaming value to the special gaming state when a game ball enters the special entry means;
When the game ball is controlled to be in the advantageous state by the variable means and the game ball enters the special ball entry means and the special game state is given , the case where the special game state is given is higher than the case where the variable means is controlled to the non-advantageous state. Also, the configuration is such that it is easy to determine the provision of the special gaming state of the predetermined type that is most advantageous to the player,
This gaming machine is
an activation standby period executed at least before the variable means controls the advantageous state ;
A presentation means capable of performing a preliminary presentation during the operation standby period ,
The performance means is configured to be able to select the preceding performance to be executed in accordance with the operation standby period from among the plurality of types of preceding performances, when executing the preceding performance,
A game ball that does not pass through the ball path is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area,
When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the variable value is applied to the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball that has entered the ball. A gaming machine characterized by having a structure in which the value of a falling game ball can be changed by the action of a means.

Images